blob: 5756f9fda42cdd06526754261b7132dbd2e11a33 [file] [log] [blame]
Ted Kremenekb60d87c2009-08-26 22:36:44 +00001/*===-- clang-c/Index.h - Indexing Public C Interface -------------*- C -*-===*\
2|* *|
3|* The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure *|
4|* *|
5|* This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source *|
6|* License. See LICENSE.TXT for details. *|
7|* *|
8|*===----------------------------------------------------------------------===*|
9|* *|
10|* This header provides a public inferface to a Clang library for extracting *|
11|* high-level symbol information from source files without exposing the full *|
12|* Clang C++ API. *|
13|* *|
14\*===----------------------------------------------------------------------===*/
15
Benjamin Kramer2f5db8b2014-08-13 16:25:19 +000016#ifndef LLVM_CLANG_C_INDEX_H
17#define LLVM_CLANG_C_INDEX_H
Ted Kremenekb60d87c2009-08-26 22:36:44 +000018
Chandler Carruthaacafe52009-12-17 09:27:29 +000019#include <time.h>
Steve Naroff6231f182009-10-27 14:35:18 +000020
Arnaud A. de Grandmaison0271b322012-06-28 22:01:06 +000021#include "clang-c/Platform.h"
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0b9682e2014-02-25 03:59:23 +000022#include "clang-c/CXErrorCode.h"
Arnaud A. de Grandmaison0271b322012-06-28 22:01:06 +000023#include "clang-c/CXString.h"
Argyrios Kyrtzidis09a439d2014-02-25 03:59:16 +000024#include "clang-c/BuildSystem.h"
Arnaud A. de Grandmaison0271b322012-06-28 22:01:06 +000025
Argyrios Kyrtzidis1c4db8d2012-11-06 21:21:49 +000026/**
27 * \brief The version constants for the libclang API.
28 * CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR should increase when there are API additions.
29 * CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR is intended for "major" source/ABI breaking changes.
30 *
31 * The policy about the libclang API was always to keep it source and ABI
32 * compatible, thus CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR is expected to remain stable.
33 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5b216ed2012-10-29 23:24:44 +000034#define CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR 0
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5dda1122016-12-01 23:41:27 +000035#define CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR 37
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5b216ed2012-10-29 23:24:44 +000036
37#define CINDEX_VERSION_ENCODE(major, minor) ( \
38 ((major) * 10000) \
39 + ((minor) * 1))
40
41#define CINDEX_VERSION CINDEX_VERSION_ENCODE( \
42 CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR, \
43 CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR )
44
45#define CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE_(major, minor) \
46 #major"."#minor
47#define CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE(major, minor) \
48 CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE_(major, minor)
49
50#define CINDEX_VERSION_STRING CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE( \
51 CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR, \
52 CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR)
53
Ted Kremenekb60d87c2009-08-26 22:36:44 +000054#ifdef __cplusplus
55extern "C" {
56#endif
57
Douglas Gregor4a4e0eb2011-02-23 17:45:25 +000058/** \defgroup CINDEX libclang: C Interface to Clang
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +000059 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000060 * The C Interface to Clang provides a relatively small API that exposes
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +000061 * facilities for parsing source code into an abstract syntax tree (AST),
62 * loading already-parsed ASTs, traversing the AST, associating
63 * physical source locations with elements within the AST, and other
64 * facilities that support Clang-based development tools.
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +000065 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000066 * This C interface to Clang will never provide all of the information
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +000067 * representation stored in Clang's C++ AST, nor should it: the intent is to
68 * maintain an API that is relatively stable from one release to the next,
69 * providing only the basic functionality needed to support development tools.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000070 *
71 * To avoid namespace pollution, data types are prefixed with "CX" and
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +000072 * functions are prefixed with "clang_".
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +000073 *
74 * @{
75 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000076
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000077/**
78 * \brief An "index" that consists of a set of translation units that would
79 * typically be linked together into an executable or library.
80 */
81typedef void *CXIndex;
Steve Naroffd5e8e862009-08-27 19:51:58 +000082
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000083/**
84 * \brief A single translation unit, which resides in an index.
85 */
Ted Kremenek7df92ae2010-11-17 23:24:11 +000086typedef struct CXTranslationUnitImpl *CXTranslationUnit;
Steve Naroffd5e8e862009-08-27 19:51:58 +000087
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000088/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +000089 * \brief Opaque pointer representing client data that will be passed through
90 * to various callbacks and visitors.
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000091 */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +000092typedef void *CXClientData;
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000093
Douglas Gregor9485bf92009-12-02 09:21:34 +000094/**
95 * \brief Provides the contents of a file that has not yet been saved to disk.
96 *
97 * Each CXUnsavedFile instance provides the name of a file on the
98 * system along with the current contents of that file that have not
99 * yet been saved to disk.
100 */
101struct CXUnsavedFile {
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000102 /**
103 * \brief The file whose contents have not yet been saved.
Douglas Gregor9485bf92009-12-02 09:21:34 +0000104 *
105 * This file must already exist in the file system.
106 */
107 const char *Filename;
108
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000109 /**
Douglas Gregor89a56c52010-02-27 01:32:48 +0000110 * \brief A buffer containing the unsaved contents of this file.
Douglas Gregor9485bf92009-12-02 09:21:34 +0000111 */
112 const char *Contents;
113
114 /**
Douglas Gregor89a56c52010-02-27 01:32:48 +0000115 * \brief The length of the unsaved contents of this buffer.
Douglas Gregor9485bf92009-12-02 09:21:34 +0000116 */
117 unsigned long Length;
118};
119
Peter Collingbourne5caf5af2010-08-24 00:31:37 +0000120/**
121 * \brief Describes the availability of a particular entity, which indicates
122 * whether the use of this entity will result in a warning or error due to
123 * it being deprecated or unavailable.
124 */
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000125enum CXAvailabilityKind {
Peter Collingbourne5caf5af2010-08-24 00:31:37 +0000126 /**
127 * \brief The entity is available.
128 */
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000129 CXAvailability_Available,
Peter Collingbourne5caf5af2010-08-24 00:31:37 +0000130 /**
131 * \brief The entity is available, but has been deprecated (and its use is
132 * not recommended).
133 */
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000134 CXAvailability_Deprecated,
Peter Collingbourne5caf5af2010-08-24 00:31:37 +0000135 /**
136 * \brief The entity is not available; any use of it will be an error.
137 */
Erik Verbruggen2e657ff2011-10-06 07:27:49 +0000138 CXAvailability_NotAvailable,
139 /**
140 * \brief The entity is available, but not accessible; any use of it will be
141 * an error.
142 */
143 CXAvailability_NotAccessible
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000144};
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +0000145
146/**
147 * \brief Describes a version number of the form major.minor.subminor.
148 */
149typedef struct CXVersion {
150 /**
151 * \brief The major version number, e.g., the '10' in '10.7.3'. A negative
152 * value indicates that there is no version number at all.
153 */
154 int Major;
155 /**
156 * \brief The minor version number, e.g., the '7' in '10.7.3'. This value
157 * will be negative if no minor version number was provided, e.g., for
158 * version '10'.
159 */
160 int Minor;
161 /**
162 * \brief The subminor version number, e.g., the '3' in '10.7.3'. This value
163 * will be negative if no minor or subminor version number was provided,
164 * e.g., in version '10' or '10.7'.
165 */
166 int Subminor;
167} CXVersion;
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000168
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +0000169/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000170 * \brief Provides a shared context for creating translation units.
171 *
172 * It provides two options:
Steve Naroff531e2842009-10-20 14:46:24 +0000173 *
174 * - excludeDeclarationsFromPCH: When non-zero, allows enumeration of "local"
175 * declarations (when loading any new translation units). A "local" declaration
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000176 * is one that belongs in the translation unit itself and not in a precompiled
Steve Naroff531e2842009-10-20 14:46:24 +0000177 * header that was used by the translation unit. If zero, all declarations
178 * will be enumerated.
179 *
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000180 * Here is an example:
181 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000182 * \code
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000183 * // excludeDeclsFromPCH = 1, displayDiagnostics=1
184 * Idx = clang_createIndex(1, 1);
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000185 *
186 * // IndexTest.pch was produced with the following command:
187 * // "clang -x c IndexTest.h -emit-ast -o IndexTest.pch"
188 * TU = clang_createTranslationUnit(Idx, "IndexTest.pch");
189 *
190 * // This will load all the symbols from 'IndexTest.pch'
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000191 * clang_visitChildren(clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(TU),
Douglas Gregor990b5762010-01-20 21:37:00 +0000192 * TranslationUnitVisitor, 0);
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000193 * clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU);
194 *
195 * // This will load all the symbols from 'IndexTest.c', excluding symbols
196 * // from 'IndexTest.pch'.
Daniel Dunbard0159262010-01-25 00:43:14 +0000197 * char *args[] = { "-Xclang", "-include-pch=IndexTest.pch" };
198 * TU = clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile(Idx, "IndexTest.c", 2, args,
199 * 0, 0);
Douglas Gregorfed36b12010-01-20 23:57:43 +0000200 * clang_visitChildren(clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(TU),
201 * TranslationUnitVisitor, 0);
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000202 * clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU);
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000203 * \endcode
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000204 *
205 * This process of creating the 'pch', loading it separately, and using it (via
206 * -include-pch) allows 'excludeDeclsFromPCH' to remove redundant callbacks
207 * (which gives the indexer the same performance benefit as the compiler).
Steve Naroff531e2842009-10-20 14:46:24 +0000208 */
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000209CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIndex clang_createIndex(int excludeDeclarationsFromPCH,
210 int displayDiagnostics);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000211
Douglas Gregor408bb742010-02-08 23:03:06 +0000212/**
213 * \brief Destroy the given index.
214 *
215 * The index must not be destroyed until all of the translation units created
216 * within that index have been destroyed.
217 */
Daniel Dunbar11089662009-12-03 01:54:28 +0000218CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeIndex(CXIndex index);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000219
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7317a5c2012-03-28 02:18:05 +0000220typedef enum {
221 /**
222 * \brief Used to indicate that no special CXIndex options are needed.
223 */
224 CXGlobalOpt_None = 0x0,
225
226 /**
227 * \brief Used to indicate that threads that libclang creates for indexing
228 * purposes should use background priority.
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000229 *
230 * Affects #clang_indexSourceFile, #clang_indexTranslationUnit,
231 * #clang_parseTranslationUnit, #clang_saveTranslationUnit.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7317a5c2012-03-28 02:18:05 +0000232 */
233 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing = 0x1,
234
235 /**
236 * \brief Used to indicate that threads that libclang creates for editing
237 * purposes should use background priority.
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000238 *
239 * Affects #clang_reparseTranslationUnit, #clang_codeCompleteAt,
240 * #clang_annotateTokens
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7317a5c2012-03-28 02:18:05 +0000241 */
242 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForEditing = 0x2,
243
244 /**
245 * \brief Used to indicate that all threads that libclang creates should use
246 * background priority.
247 */
248 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForAll =
249 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing |
250 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForEditing
251
252} CXGlobalOptFlags;
253
254/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000255 * \brief Sets general options associated with a CXIndex.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7317a5c2012-03-28 02:18:05 +0000256 *
257 * For example:
258 * \code
259 * CXIndex idx = ...;
260 * clang_CXIndex_setGlobalOptions(idx,
261 * clang_CXIndex_getGlobalOptions(idx) |
262 * CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing);
263 * \endcode
264 *
265 * \param options A bitmask of options, a bitwise OR of CXGlobalOpt_XXX flags.
266 */
267CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_CXIndex_setGlobalOptions(CXIndex, unsigned options);
268
269/**
270 * \brief Gets the general options associated with a CXIndex.
271 *
272 * \returns A bitmask of options, a bitwise OR of CXGlobalOpt_XXX flags that
273 * are associated with the given CXIndex object.
274 */
275CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXIndex_getGlobalOptions(CXIndex);
276
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000277/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +0000278 * \defgroup CINDEX_FILES File manipulation routines
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000279 *
280 * @{
281 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000282
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000283/**
284 * \brief A particular source file that is part of a translation unit.
285 */
286typedef void *CXFile;
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000287
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000288/**
289 * \brief Retrieve the complete file and path name of the given file.
Steve Naroff6231f182009-10-27 14:35:18 +0000290 */
Ted Kremenekc560b682010-02-17 00:41:20 +0000291CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getFileName(CXFile SFile);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000292
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000293/**
294 * \brief Retrieve the last modification time of the given file.
295 */
Douglas Gregor249c1212009-10-31 15:48:08 +0000296CINDEX_LINKAGE time_t clang_getFileTime(CXFile SFile);
Steve Naroff6231f182009-10-27 14:35:18 +0000297
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000298/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisac08b262013-01-26 04:52:52 +0000299 * \brief Uniquely identifies a CXFile, that refers to the same underlying file,
300 * across an indexing session.
301 */
302typedef struct {
303 unsigned long long data[3];
304} CXFileUniqueID;
305
306/**
307 * \brief Retrieve the unique ID for the given \c file.
308 *
309 * \param file the file to get the ID for.
310 * \param outID stores the returned CXFileUniqueID.
311 * \returns If there was a failure getting the unique ID, returns non-zero,
312 * otherwise returns 0.
313*/
314CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getFileUniqueID(CXFile file, CXFileUniqueID *outID);
315
316/**
Douglas Gregor37aa4932011-05-04 00:14:37 +0000317 * \brief Determine whether the given header is guarded against
318 * multiple inclusions, either with the conventional
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000319 * \#ifndef/\#define/\#endif macro guards or with \#pragma once.
Douglas Gregor37aa4932011-05-04 00:14:37 +0000320 */
321CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
322clang_isFileMultipleIncludeGuarded(CXTranslationUnit tu, CXFile file);
323
324/**
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000325 * \brief Retrieve a file handle within the given translation unit.
326 *
327 * \param tu the translation unit
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000328 *
Samuel Antao4c8035b2016-12-12 18:00:20 +0000329 * \param file_name the name of the file.
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000330 *
331 * \returns the file handle for the named file in the translation unit \p tu,
332 * or a NULL file handle if the file was not a part of this translation unit.
333 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000334CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_getFile(CXTranslationUnit tu,
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000335 const char *file_name);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000336
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000337/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisac3997e2014-08-16 00:26:19 +0000338 * \brief Returns non-zero if the \c file1 and \c file2 point to the same file,
339 * or they are both NULL.
340 */
341CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_File_isEqual(CXFile file1, CXFile file2);
342
343/**
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000344 * @}
345 */
346
347/**
348 * \defgroup CINDEX_LOCATIONS Physical source locations
349 *
350 * Clang represents physical source locations in its abstract syntax tree in
351 * great detail, with file, line, and column information for the majority of
352 * the tokens parsed in the source code. These data types and functions are
353 * used to represent source location information, either for a particular
354 * point in the program or for a range of points in the program, and extract
355 * specific location information from those data types.
356 *
357 * @{
358 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000359
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000360/**
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000361 * \brief Identifies a specific source location within a translation
362 * unit.
363 *
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000364 * Use clang_getExpansionLocation() or clang_getSpellingLocation()
Douglas Gregor229bebd2010-11-09 06:24:54 +0000365 * to map a source location to a particular file, line, and column.
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000366 */
367typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis49d9d0292013-01-11 22:29:47 +0000368 const void *ptr_data[2];
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000369 unsigned int_data;
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000370} CXSourceLocation;
Ted Kremeneka44d99c2010-01-05 23:18:49 +0000371
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000372/**
Daniel Dunbar02968e52010-02-14 10:02:57 +0000373 * \brief Identifies a half-open character range in the source code.
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000374 *
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000375 * Use clang_getRangeStart() and clang_getRangeEnd() to retrieve the
376 * starting and end locations from a source range, respectively.
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000377 */
378typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis49d9d0292013-01-11 22:29:47 +0000379 const void *ptr_data[2];
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000380 unsigned begin_int_data;
381 unsigned end_int_data;
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000382} CXSourceRange;
Ted Kremeneka44d99c2010-01-05 23:18:49 +0000383
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000384/**
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000385 * \brief Retrieve a NULL (invalid) source location.
386 */
NAKAMURA Takumieacd6672013-01-10 02:12:38 +0000387CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getNullLocation(void);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000388
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000389/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000390 * \brief Determine whether two source locations, which must refer into
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000391 * the same translation unit, refer to exactly the same point in the source
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000392 * code.
393 *
394 * \returns non-zero if the source locations refer to the same location, zero
395 * if they refer to different locations.
396 */
397CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalLocations(CXSourceLocation loc1,
398 CXSourceLocation loc2);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000399
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000400/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000401 * \brief Retrieves the source location associated with a given file/line/column
402 * in a particular translation unit.
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000403 */
404CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getLocation(CXTranslationUnit tu,
405 CXFile file,
406 unsigned line,
407 unsigned column);
David Chisnall2e16ac52010-10-15 17:07:39 +0000408/**
409 * \brief Retrieves the source location associated with a given character offset
410 * in a particular translation unit.
411 */
412CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getLocationForOffset(CXTranslationUnit tu,
413 CXFile file,
414 unsigned offset);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000415
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000416/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis25f7af12013-04-12 17:06:51 +0000417 * \brief Returns non-zero if the given source location is in a system header.
418 */
419CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Location_isInSystemHeader(CXSourceLocation location);
420
421/**
Stefanus Du Toitdb51c632013-08-08 17:48:14 +0000422 * \brief Returns non-zero if the given source location is in the main file of
423 * the corresponding translation unit.
424 */
425CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Location_isFromMainFile(CXSourceLocation location);
426
427/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000428 * \brief Retrieve a NULL (invalid) source range.
429 */
NAKAMURA Takumieacd6672013-01-10 02:12:38 +0000430CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getNullRange(void);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000431
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000432/**
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000433 * \brief Retrieve a source range given the beginning and ending source
434 * locations.
435 */
436CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getRange(CXSourceLocation begin,
437 CXSourceLocation end);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000438
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000439/**
Douglas Gregor757e38b2011-07-23 19:35:14 +0000440 * \brief Determine whether two ranges are equivalent.
441 *
442 * \returns non-zero if the ranges are the same, zero if they differ.
443 */
444CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalRanges(CXSourceRange range1,
445 CXSourceRange range2);
446
447/**
Dmitri Gribenko8994e0c2012-09-13 13:11:20 +0000448 * \brief Returns non-zero if \p range is null.
Argyrios Kyrtzidise7e42912011-09-28 18:14:21 +0000449 */
Erik Verbruggend610b0f2011-10-06 12:11:57 +0000450CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Range_isNull(CXSourceRange range);
Argyrios Kyrtzidise7e42912011-09-28 18:14:21 +0000451
452/**
Douglas Gregor9bd6db52010-01-26 19:19:08 +0000453 * \brief Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
454 * the given source location.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000455 *
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000456 * If the location refers into a macro expansion, retrieves the
457 * location of the macro expansion.
Douglas Gregor229bebd2010-11-09 06:24:54 +0000458 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000459 * \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
460 * into its parts.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000461 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000462 * \param file [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the file to which the given
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000463 * source location points.
464 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000465 * \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line to which the given
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000466 * source location points.
467 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000468 * \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column to which the given
469 * source location points.
Douglas Gregor9bd6db52010-01-26 19:19:08 +0000470 *
471 * \param offset [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the offset into the
472 * buffer to which the given source location points.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000473 */
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000474CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getExpansionLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
475 CXFile *file,
476 unsigned *line,
477 unsigned *column,
478 unsigned *offset);
479
480/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis91672b32011-09-13 21:49:08 +0000481 * \brief Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
482 * the given source location, as specified in a # line directive.
483 *
484 * Example: given the following source code in a file somefile.c
485 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000486 * \code
Argyrios Kyrtzidis91672b32011-09-13 21:49:08 +0000487 * #123 "dummy.c" 1
488 *
489 * static int func(void)
490 * {
491 * return 0;
492 * }
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000493 * \endcode
Argyrios Kyrtzidis91672b32011-09-13 21:49:08 +0000494 *
495 * the location information returned by this function would be
496 *
497 * File: dummy.c Line: 124 Column: 12
498 *
499 * whereas clang_getExpansionLocation would have returned
500 *
501 * File: somefile.c Line: 3 Column: 12
502 *
503 * \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
504 * into its parts.
505 *
506 * \param filename [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the filename of the
507 * source location. Note that filenames returned will be for "virtual" files,
508 * which don't necessarily exist on the machine running clang - e.g. when
509 * parsing preprocessed output obtained from a different environment. If
510 * a non-NULL value is passed in, remember to dispose of the returned value
511 * using \c clang_disposeString() once you've finished with it. For an invalid
512 * source location, an empty string is returned.
513 *
514 * \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line number of the
515 * source location. For an invalid source location, zero is returned.
516 *
517 * \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column number of the
518 * source location. For an invalid source location, zero is returned.
519 */
520CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getPresumedLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
521 CXString *filename,
522 unsigned *line,
523 unsigned *column);
524
525/**
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000526 * \brief Legacy API to retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented
527 * by the given source location.
528 *
529 * This interface has been replaced by the newer interface
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000530 * #clang_getExpansionLocation(). See that interface's documentation for
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000531 * details.
532 */
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000533CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getInstantiationLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
534 CXFile *file,
535 unsigned *line,
Douglas Gregor9bd6db52010-01-26 19:19:08 +0000536 unsigned *column,
537 unsigned *offset);
Douglas Gregor47751d62010-01-26 03:07:15 +0000538
539/**
Douglas Gregor229bebd2010-11-09 06:24:54 +0000540 * \brief Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
541 * the given source location.
542 *
543 * If the location refers into a macro instantiation, return where the
544 * location was originally spelled in the source file.
545 *
546 * \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
547 * into its parts.
548 *
549 * \param file [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the file to which the given
550 * source location points.
551 *
552 * \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line to which the given
553 * source location points.
554 *
555 * \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column to which the given
556 * source location points.
557 *
558 * \param offset [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the offset into the
559 * buffer to which the given source location points.
560 */
561CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getSpellingLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
562 CXFile *file,
563 unsigned *line,
564 unsigned *column,
565 unsigned *offset);
566
567/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis56be7162013-01-04 18:30:13 +0000568 * \brief Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
569 * the given source location.
570 *
571 * If the location refers into a macro expansion, return where the macro was
572 * expanded or where the macro argument was written, if the location points at
573 * a macro argument.
574 *
575 * \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
576 * into its parts.
577 *
578 * \param file [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the file to which the given
579 * source location points.
580 *
581 * \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line to which the given
582 * source location points.
583 *
584 * \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column to which the given
585 * source location points.
586 *
587 * \param offset [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the offset into the
588 * buffer to which the given source location points.
589 */
590CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getFileLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
591 CXFile *file,
592 unsigned *line,
593 unsigned *column,
594 unsigned *offset);
595
596/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000597 * \brief Retrieve a source location representing the first character within a
598 * source range.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000599 */
600CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getRangeStart(CXSourceRange range);
601
602/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000603 * \brief Retrieve a source location representing the last character within a
604 * source range.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000605 */
606CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getRangeEnd(CXSourceRange range);
607
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000608/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000609 * \brief Identifies an array of ranges.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000610 */
611typedef struct {
612 /** \brief The number of ranges in the \c ranges array. */
613 unsigned count;
614 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000615 * \brief An array of \c CXSourceRanges.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000616 */
617 CXSourceRange *ranges;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000618} CXSourceRangeList;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000619
620/**
621 * \brief Retrieve all ranges that were skipped by the preprocessor.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000622 *
623 * The preprocessor will skip lines when they are surrounded by an
624 * if/ifdef/ifndef directive whose condition does not evaluate to true.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000625 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000626CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRangeList *clang_getSkippedRanges(CXTranslationUnit tu,
627 CXFile file);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000628
629/**
Cameron Desrochersd8091282016-08-18 15:43:55 +0000630 * \brief Retrieve all ranges from all files that were skipped by the
631 * preprocessor.
632 *
633 * The preprocessor will skip lines when they are surrounded by an
634 * if/ifdef/ifndef directive whose condition does not evaluate to true.
635 */
636CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRangeList *clang_getAllSkippedRanges(CXTranslationUnit tu);
637
638/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000639 * \brief Destroy the given \c CXSourceRangeList.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000640 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000641CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeSourceRangeList(CXSourceRangeList *ranges);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000642
643/**
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000644 * @}
645 */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +0000646
647/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000648 * \defgroup CINDEX_DIAG Diagnostic reporting
649 *
650 * @{
651 */
652
653/**
654 * \brief Describes the severity of a particular diagnostic.
655 */
656enum CXDiagnosticSeverity {
657 /**
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000658 * \brief A diagnostic that has been suppressed, e.g., by a command-line
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000659 * option.
660 */
661 CXDiagnostic_Ignored = 0,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000662
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000663 /**
664 * \brief This diagnostic is a note that should be attached to the
665 * previous (non-note) diagnostic.
666 */
667 CXDiagnostic_Note = 1,
668
669 /**
670 * \brief This diagnostic indicates suspicious code that may not be
671 * wrong.
672 */
673 CXDiagnostic_Warning = 2,
674
675 /**
676 * \brief This diagnostic indicates that the code is ill-formed.
677 */
678 CXDiagnostic_Error = 3,
679
680 /**
681 * \brief This diagnostic indicates that the code is ill-formed such
682 * that future parser recovery is unlikely to produce useful
683 * results.
684 */
685 CXDiagnostic_Fatal = 4
686};
687
688/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000689 * \brief A single diagnostic, containing the diagnostic's severity,
690 * location, text, source ranges, and fix-it hints.
691 */
692typedef void *CXDiagnostic;
693
694/**
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000695 * \brief A group of CXDiagnostics.
696 */
697typedef void *CXDiagnosticSet;
698
699/**
700 * \brief Determine the number of diagnostics in a CXDiagnosticSet.
701 */
702CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getNumDiagnosticsInSet(CXDiagnosticSet Diags);
703
704/**
705 * \brief Retrieve a diagnostic associated with the given CXDiagnosticSet.
706 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000707 * \param Diags the CXDiagnosticSet to query.
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000708 * \param Index the zero-based diagnostic number to retrieve.
709 *
710 * \returns the requested diagnostic. This diagnostic must be freed
711 * via a call to \c clang_disposeDiagnostic().
712 */
713CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnostic clang_getDiagnosticInSet(CXDiagnosticSet Diags,
714 unsigned Index);
715
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000716/**
717 * \brief Describes the kind of error that occurred (if any) in a call to
718 * \c clang_loadDiagnostics.
719 */
720enum CXLoadDiag_Error {
721 /**
722 * \brief Indicates that no error occurred.
723 */
724 CXLoadDiag_None = 0,
725
726 /**
727 * \brief Indicates that an unknown error occurred while attempting to
728 * deserialize diagnostics.
729 */
730 CXLoadDiag_Unknown = 1,
731
732 /**
733 * \brief Indicates that the file containing the serialized diagnostics
734 * could not be opened.
735 */
736 CXLoadDiag_CannotLoad = 2,
737
738 /**
739 * \brief Indicates that the serialized diagnostics file is invalid or
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000740 * corrupt.
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000741 */
742 CXLoadDiag_InvalidFile = 3
743};
744
745/**
746 * \brief Deserialize a set of diagnostics from a Clang diagnostics bitcode
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000747 * file.
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000748 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000749 * \param file The name of the file to deserialize.
750 * \param error A pointer to a enum value recording if there was a problem
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000751 * deserializing the diagnostics.
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000752 * \param errorString A pointer to a CXString for recording the error string
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000753 * if the file was not successfully loaded.
754 *
755 * \returns A loaded CXDiagnosticSet if successful, and NULL otherwise. These
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000756 * diagnostics should be released using clang_disposeDiagnosticSet().
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000757 */
758CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnosticSet clang_loadDiagnostics(const char *file,
759 enum CXLoadDiag_Error *error,
760 CXString *errorString);
761
762/**
763 * \brief Release a CXDiagnosticSet and all of its contained diagnostics.
764 */
765CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeDiagnosticSet(CXDiagnosticSet Diags);
766
767/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000768 * \brief Retrieve the child diagnostics of a CXDiagnostic.
769 *
770 * This CXDiagnosticSet does not need to be released by
Sylvestre Ledrud29d97c2013-11-17 09:46:45 +0000771 * clang_disposeDiagnosticSet.
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000772 */
773CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnosticSet clang_getChildDiagnostics(CXDiagnostic D);
774
775/**
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +0000776 * \brief Determine the number of diagnostics produced for the given
777 * translation unit.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000778 */
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +0000779CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getNumDiagnostics(CXTranslationUnit Unit);
780
781/**
782 * \brief Retrieve a diagnostic associated with the given translation unit.
783 *
784 * \param Unit the translation unit to query.
785 * \param Index the zero-based diagnostic number to retrieve.
786 *
787 * \returns the requested diagnostic. This diagnostic must be freed
788 * via a call to \c clang_disposeDiagnostic().
789 */
790CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnostic clang_getDiagnostic(CXTranslationUnit Unit,
791 unsigned Index);
792
793/**
Ted Kremenekb4a8b052011-12-09 22:28:32 +0000794 * \brief Retrieve the complete set of diagnostics associated with a
795 * translation unit.
796 *
797 * \param Unit the translation unit to query.
798 */
799CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnosticSet
800 clang_getDiagnosticSetFromTU(CXTranslationUnit Unit);
801
802/**
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +0000803 * \brief Destroy a diagnostic.
804 */
805CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeDiagnostic(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic);
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000806
807/**
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000808 * \brief Options to control the display of diagnostics.
809 *
810 * The values in this enum are meant to be combined to customize the
Sylvestre Ledrud29d97c2013-11-17 09:46:45 +0000811 * behavior of \c clang_formatDiagnostic().
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000812 */
813enum CXDiagnosticDisplayOptions {
814 /**
815 * \brief Display the source-location information where the
816 * diagnostic was located.
817 *
818 * When set, diagnostics will be prefixed by the file, line, and
819 * (optionally) column to which the diagnostic refers. For example,
820 *
821 * \code
822 * test.c:28: warning: extra tokens at end of #endif directive
823 * \endcode
824 *
825 * This option corresponds to the clang flag \c -fshow-source-location.
826 */
827 CXDiagnostic_DisplaySourceLocation = 0x01,
828
829 /**
830 * \brief If displaying the source-location information of the
831 * diagnostic, also include the column number.
832 *
833 * This option corresponds to the clang flag \c -fshow-column.
834 */
835 CXDiagnostic_DisplayColumn = 0x02,
836
837 /**
838 * \brief If displaying the source-location information of the
839 * diagnostic, also include information about source ranges in a
840 * machine-parsable format.
841 *
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000842 * This option corresponds to the clang flag
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000843 * \c -fdiagnostics-print-source-range-info.
844 */
Douglas Gregora750e8e2010-11-19 16:18:16 +0000845 CXDiagnostic_DisplaySourceRanges = 0x04,
846
847 /**
848 * \brief Display the option name associated with this diagnostic, if any.
849 *
850 * The option name displayed (e.g., -Wconversion) will be placed in brackets
851 * after the diagnostic text. This option corresponds to the clang flag
852 * \c -fdiagnostics-show-option.
853 */
854 CXDiagnostic_DisplayOption = 0x08,
855
856 /**
857 * \brief Display the category number associated with this diagnostic, if any.
858 *
859 * The category number is displayed within brackets after the diagnostic text.
860 * This option corresponds to the clang flag
861 * \c -fdiagnostics-show-category=id.
862 */
863 CXDiagnostic_DisplayCategoryId = 0x10,
864
865 /**
866 * \brief Display the category name associated with this diagnostic, if any.
867 *
868 * The category name is displayed within brackets after the diagnostic text.
869 * This option corresponds to the clang flag
870 * \c -fdiagnostics-show-category=name.
871 */
872 CXDiagnostic_DisplayCategoryName = 0x20
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000873};
874
875/**
Douglas Gregord770f732010-02-22 23:17:23 +0000876 * \brief Format the given diagnostic in a manner that is suitable for display.
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000877 *
Douglas Gregord770f732010-02-22 23:17:23 +0000878 * This routine will format the given diagnostic to a string, rendering
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000879 * the diagnostic according to the various options given. The
880 * \c clang_defaultDiagnosticDisplayOptions() function returns the set of
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000881 * options that most closely mimics the behavior of the clang compiler.
882 *
883 * \param Diagnostic The diagnostic to print.
884 *
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000885 * \param Options A set of options that control the diagnostic display,
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000886 * created by combining \c CXDiagnosticDisplayOptions values.
Douglas Gregord770f732010-02-22 23:17:23 +0000887 *
888 * \returns A new string containing for formatted diagnostic.
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000889 */
Douglas Gregord770f732010-02-22 23:17:23 +0000890CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_formatDiagnostic(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic,
891 unsigned Options);
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000892
893/**
894 * \brief Retrieve the set of display options most similar to the
895 * default behavior of the clang compiler.
896 *
897 * \returns A set of display options suitable for use with \c
Sylvestre Ledrud29d97c2013-11-17 09:46:45 +0000898 * clang_formatDiagnostic().
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000899 */
900CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultDiagnosticDisplayOptions(void);
901
902/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000903 * \brief Determine the severity of the given diagnostic.
904 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000905CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXDiagnosticSeverity
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000906clang_getDiagnosticSeverity(CXDiagnostic);
907
908/**
909 * \brief Retrieve the source location of the given diagnostic.
910 *
911 * This location is where Clang would print the caret ('^') when
912 * displaying the diagnostic on the command line.
913 */
914CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getDiagnosticLocation(CXDiagnostic);
915
916/**
917 * \brief Retrieve the text of the given diagnostic.
918 */
919CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticSpelling(CXDiagnostic);
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000920
921/**
Douglas Gregora750e8e2010-11-19 16:18:16 +0000922 * \brief Retrieve the name of the command-line option that enabled this
923 * diagnostic.
924 *
925 * \param Diag The diagnostic to be queried.
926 *
927 * \param Disable If non-NULL, will be set to the option that disables this
928 * diagnostic (if any).
929 *
930 * \returns A string that contains the command-line option used to enable this
931 * warning, such as "-Wconversion" or "-pedantic".
932 */
933CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticOption(CXDiagnostic Diag,
934 CXString *Disable);
935
936/**
937 * \brief Retrieve the category number for this diagnostic.
938 *
939 * Diagnostics can be categorized into groups along with other, related
940 * diagnostics (e.g., diagnostics under the same warning flag). This routine
941 * retrieves the category number for the given diagnostic.
942 *
943 * \returns The number of the category that contains this diagnostic, or zero
944 * if this diagnostic is uncategorized.
945 */
946CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getDiagnosticCategory(CXDiagnostic);
947
948/**
Ted Kremenek26a6d492012-04-12 00:03:31 +0000949 * \brief Retrieve the name of a particular diagnostic category. This
950 * is now deprecated. Use clang_getDiagnosticCategoryText()
951 * instead.
Douglas Gregora750e8e2010-11-19 16:18:16 +0000952 *
953 * \param Category A diagnostic category number, as returned by
954 * \c clang_getDiagnosticCategory().
955 *
956 * \returns The name of the given diagnostic category.
957 */
Ted Kremenek26a6d492012-04-12 00:03:31 +0000958CINDEX_DEPRECATED CINDEX_LINKAGE
959CXString clang_getDiagnosticCategoryName(unsigned Category);
960
961/**
962 * \brief Retrieve the diagnostic category text for a given diagnostic.
963 *
Ted Kremenek26a6d492012-04-12 00:03:31 +0000964 * \returns The text of the given diagnostic category.
965 */
966CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticCategoryText(CXDiagnostic);
Douglas Gregora750e8e2010-11-19 16:18:16 +0000967
968/**
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000969 * \brief Determine the number of source ranges associated with the given
970 * diagnostic.
971 */
972CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getDiagnosticNumRanges(CXDiagnostic);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000973
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000974/**
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000975 * \brief Retrieve a source range associated with the diagnostic.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000976 *
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000977 * A diagnostic's source ranges highlight important elements in the source
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000978 * code. On the command line, Clang displays source ranges by
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000979 * underlining them with '~' characters.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000980 *
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000981 * \param Diagnostic the diagnostic whose range is being extracted.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000982 *
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000983 * \param Range the zero-based index specifying which range to
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000984 *
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000985 * \returns the requested source range.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000986 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000987CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getDiagnosticRange(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic,
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000988 unsigned Range);
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000989
990/**
991 * \brief Determine the number of fix-it hints associated with the
992 * given diagnostic.
993 */
994CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getDiagnosticNumFixIts(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic);
995
996/**
Douglas Gregor836ec942010-02-19 18:16:06 +0000997 * \brief Retrieve the replacement information for a given fix-it.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000998 *
Douglas Gregor836ec942010-02-19 18:16:06 +0000999 * Fix-its are described in terms of a source range whose contents
1000 * should be replaced by a string. This approach generalizes over
1001 * three kinds of operations: removal of source code (the range covers
1002 * the code to be removed and the replacement string is empty),
1003 * replacement of source code (the range covers the code to be
1004 * replaced and the replacement string provides the new code), and
1005 * insertion (both the start and end of the range point at the
1006 * insertion location, and the replacement string provides the text to
1007 * insert).
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001008 *
Douglas Gregor836ec942010-02-19 18:16:06 +00001009 * \param Diagnostic The diagnostic whose fix-its are being queried.
1010 *
1011 * \param FixIt The zero-based index of the fix-it.
1012 *
1013 * \param ReplacementRange The source range whose contents will be
1014 * replaced with the returned replacement string. Note that source
1015 * ranges are half-open ranges [a, b), so the source code should be
1016 * replaced from a and up to (but not including) b.
1017 *
1018 * \returns A string containing text that should be replace the source
1019 * code indicated by the \c ReplacementRange.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001020 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001021CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticFixIt(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic,
Douglas Gregor836ec942010-02-19 18:16:06 +00001022 unsigned FixIt,
1023 CXSourceRange *ReplacementRange);
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001024
1025/**
1026 * @}
1027 */
1028
1029/**
1030 * \defgroup CINDEX_TRANSLATION_UNIT Translation unit manipulation
1031 *
1032 * The routines in this group provide the ability to create and destroy
1033 * translation units from files, either by parsing the contents of the files or
1034 * by reading in a serialized representation of a translation unit.
1035 *
1036 * @{
1037 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001038
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001039/**
1040 * \brief Get the original translation unit source file name.
1041 */
1042CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
1043clang_getTranslationUnitSpelling(CXTranslationUnit CTUnit);
1044
1045/**
1046 * \brief Return the CXTranslationUnit for a given source file and the provided
1047 * command line arguments one would pass to the compiler.
1048 *
1049 * Note: The 'source_filename' argument is optional. If the caller provides a
1050 * NULL pointer, the name of the source file is expected to reside in the
1051 * specified command line arguments.
1052 *
1053 * Note: When encountered in 'clang_command_line_args', the following options
1054 * are ignored:
1055 *
1056 * '-c'
1057 * '-emit-ast'
1058 * '-fsyntax-only'
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001059 * '-o \<output file>' (both '-o' and '\<output file>' are ignored)
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001060 *
Ted Kremenekbd4972442010-11-08 04:28:51 +00001061 * \param CIdx The index object with which the translation unit will be
1062 * associated.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001063 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001064 * \param source_filename The name of the source file to load, or NULL if the
Ted Kremenekbd4972442010-11-08 04:28:51 +00001065 * source file is included in \p clang_command_line_args.
1066 *
1067 * \param num_clang_command_line_args The number of command-line arguments in
1068 * \p clang_command_line_args.
1069 *
1070 * \param clang_command_line_args The command-line arguments that would be
1071 * passed to the \c clang executable if it were being invoked out-of-process.
1072 * These command-line options will be parsed and will affect how the translation
1073 * unit is parsed. Note that the following options are ignored: '-c',
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001074 * '-emit-ast', '-fsyntax-only' (which is the default), and '-o \<output file>'.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001075 *
1076 * \param num_unsaved_files the number of unsaved file entries in \p
1077 * unsaved_files.
1078 *
1079 * \param unsaved_files the files that have not yet been saved to disk
1080 * but may be required for code completion, including the contents of
Ted Kremenekde24a942010-04-12 18:47:26 +00001081 * those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by
1082 * CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to
1083 * guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001084 */
1085CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile(
1086 CXIndex CIdx,
1087 const char *source_filename,
1088 int num_clang_command_line_args,
Douglas Gregor57879fa2010-09-01 16:43:19 +00001089 const char * const *clang_command_line_args,
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001090 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00001091 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001092
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001093/**
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001094 * \brief Same as \c clang_createTranslationUnit2, but returns
1095 * the \c CXTranslationUnit instead of an error code. In case of an error this
1096 * routine returns a \c NULL \c CXTranslationUnit, without further detailed
1097 * error codes.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001098 */
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001099CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_createTranslationUnit(
1100 CXIndex CIdx,
1101 const char *ast_filename);
1102
1103/**
1104 * \brief Create a translation unit from an AST file (\c -emit-ast).
1105 *
1106 * \param[out] out_TU A non-NULL pointer to store the created
1107 * \c CXTranslationUnit.
1108 *
1109 * \returns Zero on success, otherwise returns an error code.
1110 */
1111CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode clang_createTranslationUnit2(
1112 CXIndex CIdx,
1113 const char *ast_filename,
1114 CXTranslationUnit *out_TU);
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001115
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001116/**
1117 * \brief Flags that control the creation of translation units.
1118 *
1119 * The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise
1120 * ORed together to specify which options should be used when
1121 * constructing the translation unit.
1122 */
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001123enum CXTranslationUnit_Flags {
1124 /**
1125 * \brief Used to indicate that no special translation-unit options are
1126 * needed.
1127 */
1128 CXTranslationUnit_None = 0x0,
1129
1130 /**
1131 * \brief Used to indicate that the parser should construct a "detailed"
1132 * preprocessing record, including all macro definitions and instantiations.
1133 *
1134 * Constructing a detailed preprocessing record requires more memory
1135 * and time to parse, since the information contained in the record
1136 * is usually not retained. However, it can be useful for
1137 * applications that require more detailed information about the
1138 * behavior of the preprocessor.
1139 */
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001140 CXTranslationUnit_DetailedPreprocessingRecord = 0x01,
1141
1142 /**
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001143 * \brief Used to indicate that the translation unit is incomplete.
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001144 *
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001145 * When a translation unit is considered "incomplete", semantic
1146 * analysis that is typically performed at the end of the
1147 * translation unit will be suppressed. For example, this suppresses
1148 * the completion of tentative declarations in C and of
1149 * instantiation of implicitly-instantiation function templates in
1150 * C++. This option is typically used when parsing a header with the
1151 * intent of producing a precompiled header.
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001152 */
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001153 CXTranslationUnit_Incomplete = 0x02,
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001154
1155 /**
1156 * \brief Used to indicate that the translation unit should be built with an
1157 * implicit precompiled header for the preamble.
1158 *
1159 * An implicit precompiled header is used as an optimization when a
1160 * particular translation unit is likely to be reparsed many times
1161 * when the sources aren't changing that often. In this case, an
1162 * implicit precompiled header will be built containing all of the
1163 * initial includes at the top of the main file (what we refer to as
1164 * the "preamble" of the file). In subsequent parses, if the
1165 * preamble or the files in it have not changed, \c
1166 * clang_reparseTranslationUnit() will re-use the implicit
1167 * precompiled header to improve parsing performance.
1168 */
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001169 CXTranslationUnit_PrecompiledPreamble = 0x04,
1170
1171 /**
1172 * \brief Used to indicate that the translation unit should cache some
1173 * code-completion results with each reparse of the source file.
1174 *
1175 * Caching of code-completion results is a performance optimization that
1176 * introduces some overhead to reparsing but improves the performance of
1177 * code-completion operations.
1178 */
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001179 CXTranslationUnit_CacheCompletionResults = 0x08,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0db720f2012-10-11 16:05:00 +00001180
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001181 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0db720f2012-10-11 16:05:00 +00001182 * \brief Used to indicate that the translation unit will be serialized with
1183 * \c clang_saveTranslationUnit.
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001184 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0db720f2012-10-11 16:05:00 +00001185 * This option is typically used when parsing a header with the intent of
1186 * producing a precompiled header.
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001187 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0db720f2012-10-11 16:05:00 +00001188 CXTranslationUnit_ForSerialization = 0x10,
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001189
1190 /**
Douglas Gregor2ed0ee12011-08-25 22:54:01 +00001191 * \brief DEPRECATED: Enabled chained precompiled preambles in C++.
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001192 *
1193 * Note: this is a *temporary* option that is available only while
Douglas Gregor2ed0ee12011-08-25 22:54:01 +00001194 * we are testing C++ precompiled preamble support. It is deprecated.
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001195 */
Erik Verbruggen6e922512012-04-12 10:11:59 +00001196 CXTranslationUnit_CXXChainedPCH = 0x20,
1197
1198 /**
1199 * \brief Used to indicate that function/method bodies should be skipped while
1200 * parsing.
1201 *
1202 * This option can be used to search for declarations/definitions while
1203 * ignoring the usages.
1204 */
Dmitri Gribenko3292d062012-07-02 17:35:10 +00001205 CXTranslationUnit_SkipFunctionBodies = 0x40,
1206
1207 /**
1208 * \brief Used to indicate that brief documentation comments should be
1209 * included into the set of code completions returned from this translation
1210 * unit.
1211 */
Benjamin Kramer5c248d82015-12-15 09:30:31 +00001212 CXTranslationUnit_IncludeBriefCommentsInCodeCompletion = 0x80,
1213
1214 /**
1215 * \brief Used to indicate that the precompiled preamble should be created on
1216 * the first parse. Otherwise it will be created on the first reparse. This
1217 * trades runtime on the first parse (serializing the preamble takes time) for
1218 * reduced runtime on the second parse (can now reuse the preamble).
1219 */
Manuel Klimek016c0242016-03-01 10:56:19 +00001220 CXTranslationUnit_CreatePreambleOnFirstParse = 0x100,
1221
1222 /**
1223 * \brief Do not stop processing when fatal errors are encountered.
1224 *
1225 * When fatal errors are encountered while parsing a translation unit,
1226 * semantic analysis is typically stopped early when compiling code. A common
1227 * source for fatal errors are unresolvable include files. For the
1228 * purposes of an IDE, this is undesirable behavior and as much information
1229 * as possible should be reported. Use this flag to enable this behavior.
1230 */
1231 CXTranslationUnit_KeepGoing = 0x200
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001232};
1233
1234/**
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001235 * \brief Returns the set of flags that is suitable for parsing a translation
1236 * unit that is being edited.
1237 *
1238 * The set of flags returned provide options for \c clang_parseTranslationUnit()
1239 * to indicate that the translation unit is likely to be reparsed many times,
1240 * either explicitly (via \c clang_reparseTranslationUnit()) or implicitly
1241 * (e.g., by code completion (\c clang_codeCompletionAt())). The returned flag
1242 * set contains an unspecified set of optimizations (e.g., the precompiled
1243 * preamble) geared toward improving the performance of these routines. The
1244 * set of optimizations enabled may change from one version to the next.
1245 */
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001246CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultEditingTranslationUnitOptions(void);
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001247
1248/**
1249 * \brief Same as \c clang_parseTranslationUnit2, but returns
1250 * the \c CXTranslationUnit instead of an error code. In case of an error this
1251 * routine returns a \c NULL \c CXTranslationUnit, without further detailed
1252 * error codes.
1253 */
1254CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit
1255clang_parseTranslationUnit(CXIndex CIdx,
1256 const char *source_filename,
1257 const char *const *command_line_args,
1258 int num_command_line_args,
1259 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
1260 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
1261 unsigned options);
1262
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001263/**
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001264 * \brief Parse the given source file and the translation unit corresponding
1265 * to that file.
1266 *
1267 * This routine is the main entry point for the Clang C API, providing the
1268 * ability to parse a source file into a translation unit that can then be
1269 * queried by other functions in the API. This routine accepts a set of
1270 * command-line arguments so that the compilation can be configured in the same
1271 * way that the compiler is configured on the command line.
1272 *
1273 * \param CIdx The index object with which the translation unit will be
1274 * associated.
1275 *
1276 * \param source_filename The name of the source file to load, or NULL if the
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001277 * source file is included in \c command_line_args.
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001278 *
1279 * \param command_line_args The command-line arguments that would be
1280 * passed to the \c clang executable if it were being invoked out-of-process.
1281 * These command-line options will be parsed and will affect how the translation
1282 * unit is parsed. Note that the following options are ignored: '-c',
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001283 * '-emit-ast', '-fsyntax-only' (which is the default), and '-o \<output file>'.
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001284 *
1285 * \param num_command_line_args The number of command-line arguments in
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001286 * \c command_line_args.
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001287 *
1288 * \param unsaved_files the files that have not yet been saved to disk
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00001289 * but may be required for parsing, including the contents of
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001290 * those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by
1291 * CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to
1292 * guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns.
1293 *
1294 * \param num_unsaved_files the number of unsaved file entries in \p
1295 * unsaved_files.
1296 *
1297 * \param options A bitmask of options that affects how the translation unit
1298 * is managed but not its compilation. This should be a bitwise OR of the
1299 * CXTranslationUnit_XXX flags.
1300 *
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001301 * \param[out] out_TU A non-NULL pointer to store the created
1302 * \c CXTranslationUnit, describing the parsed code and containing any
1303 * diagnostics produced by the compiler.
1304 *
1305 * \returns Zero on success, otherwise returns an error code.
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001306 */
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001307CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode
1308clang_parseTranslationUnit2(CXIndex CIdx,
1309 const char *source_filename,
1310 const char *const *command_line_args,
1311 int num_command_line_args,
1312 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
1313 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
1314 unsigned options,
1315 CXTranslationUnit *out_TU);
1316
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001317/**
Benjamin Kramerc02670e2015-11-18 16:14:27 +00001318 * \brief Same as clang_parseTranslationUnit2 but requires a full command line
1319 * for \c command_line_args including argv[0]. This is useful if the standard
1320 * library paths are relative to the binary.
1321 */
1322CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode clang_parseTranslationUnit2FullArgv(
1323 CXIndex CIdx, const char *source_filename,
1324 const char *const *command_line_args, int num_command_line_args,
1325 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files, unsigned num_unsaved_files,
1326 unsigned options, CXTranslationUnit *out_TU);
1327
1328/**
Douglas Gregor6bb92ec2010-08-13 15:35:05 +00001329 * \brief Flags that control how translation units are saved.
1330 *
1331 * The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise
1332 * ORed together to specify which options should be used when
1333 * saving the translation unit.
1334 */
1335enum CXSaveTranslationUnit_Flags {
1336 /**
1337 * \brief Used to indicate that no special saving options are needed.
1338 */
1339 CXSaveTranslationUnit_None = 0x0
1340};
1341
1342/**
1343 * \brief Returns the set of flags that is suitable for saving a translation
1344 * unit.
1345 *
1346 * The set of flags returned provide options for
1347 * \c clang_saveTranslationUnit() by default. The returned flag
1348 * set contains an unspecified set of options that save translation units with
1349 * the most commonly-requested data.
1350 */
1351CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultSaveOptions(CXTranslationUnit TU);
1352
1353/**
Douglas Gregor30c80fa2011-07-06 16:43:36 +00001354 * \brief Describes the kind of error that occurred (if any) in a call to
1355 * \c clang_saveTranslationUnit().
1356 */
1357enum CXSaveError {
1358 /**
1359 * \brief Indicates that no error occurred while saving a translation unit.
1360 */
1361 CXSaveError_None = 0,
1362
1363 /**
1364 * \brief Indicates that an unknown error occurred while attempting to save
1365 * the file.
1366 *
1367 * This error typically indicates that file I/O failed when attempting to
1368 * write the file.
1369 */
1370 CXSaveError_Unknown = 1,
1371
1372 /**
1373 * \brief Indicates that errors during translation prevented this attempt
1374 * to save the translation unit.
1375 *
1376 * Errors that prevent the translation unit from being saved can be
1377 * extracted using \c clang_getNumDiagnostics() and \c clang_getDiagnostic().
1378 */
1379 CXSaveError_TranslationErrors = 2,
1380
1381 /**
1382 * \brief Indicates that the translation unit to be saved was somehow
1383 * invalid (e.g., NULL).
1384 */
1385 CXSaveError_InvalidTU = 3
1386};
1387
1388/**
Douglas Gregore9386682010-08-13 05:36:37 +00001389 * \brief Saves a translation unit into a serialized representation of
1390 * that translation unit on disk.
1391 *
1392 * Any translation unit that was parsed without error can be saved
1393 * into a file. The translation unit can then be deserialized into a
1394 * new \c CXTranslationUnit with \c clang_createTranslationUnit() or,
1395 * if it is an incomplete translation unit that corresponds to a
1396 * header, used as a precompiled header when parsing other translation
1397 * units.
1398 *
1399 * \param TU The translation unit to save.
Douglas Gregor6bb92ec2010-08-13 15:35:05 +00001400 *
Douglas Gregore9386682010-08-13 05:36:37 +00001401 * \param FileName The file to which the translation unit will be saved.
1402 *
Douglas Gregor6bb92ec2010-08-13 15:35:05 +00001403 * \param options A bitmask of options that affects how the translation unit
1404 * is saved. This should be a bitwise OR of the
1405 * CXSaveTranslationUnit_XXX flags.
1406 *
Douglas Gregor30c80fa2011-07-06 16:43:36 +00001407 * \returns A value that will match one of the enumerators of the CXSaveError
1408 * enumeration. Zero (CXSaveError_None) indicates that the translation unit was
1409 * saved successfully, while a non-zero value indicates that a problem occurred.
Douglas Gregore9386682010-08-13 05:36:37 +00001410 */
1411CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_saveTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit TU,
Douglas Gregor6bb92ec2010-08-13 15:35:05 +00001412 const char *FileName,
1413 unsigned options);
Douglas Gregore9386682010-08-13 05:36:37 +00001414
1415/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001416 * \brief Destroy the specified CXTranslationUnit object.
1417 */
1418CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001419
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001420/**
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001421 * \brief Flags that control the reparsing of translation units.
1422 *
1423 * The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise
1424 * ORed together to specify which options should be used when
1425 * reparsing the translation unit.
1426 */
1427enum CXReparse_Flags {
1428 /**
1429 * \brief Used to indicate that no special reparsing options are needed.
1430 */
1431 CXReparse_None = 0x0
1432};
1433
1434/**
1435 * \brief Returns the set of flags that is suitable for reparsing a translation
1436 * unit.
1437 *
1438 * The set of flags returned provide options for
1439 * \c clang_reparseTranslationUnit() by default. The returned flag
1440 * set contains an unspecified set of optimizations geared toward common uses
1441 * of reparsing. The set of optimizations enabled may change from one version
1442 * to the next.
1443 */
1444CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultReparseOptions(CXTranslationUnit TU);
1445
1446/**
Douglas Gregoraa21cc42010-07-19 21:46:24 +00001447 * \brief Reparse the source files that produced this translation unit.
1448 *
1449 * This routine can be used to re-parse the source files that originally
1450 * created the given translation unit, for example because those source files
1451 * have changed (either on disk or as passed via \p unsaved_files). The
1452 * source code will be reparsed with the same command-line options as it
1453 * was originally parsed.
1454 *
1455 * Reparsing a translation unit invalidates all cursors and source locations
1456 * that refer into that translation unit. This makes reparsing a translation
1457 * unit semantically equivalent to destroying the translation unit and then
1458 * creating a new translation unit with the same command-line arguments.
1459 * However, it may be more efficient to reparse a translation
1460 * unit using this routine.
1461 *
1462 * \param TU The translation unit whose contents will be re-parsed. The
1463 * translation unit must originally have been built with
1464 * \c clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile().
1465 *
1466 * \param num_unsaved_files The number of unsaved file entries in \p
1467 * unsaved_files.
1468 *
1469 * \param unsaved_files The files that have not yet been saved to disk
1470 * but may be required for parsing, including the contents of
1471 * those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by
1472 * CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to
1473 * guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns.
1474 *
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001475 * \param options A bitset of options composed of the flags in CXReparse_Flags.
1476 * The function \c clang_defaultReparseOptions() produces a default set of
1477 * options recommended for most uses, based on the translation unit.
1478 *
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001479 * \returns 0 if the sources could be reparsed. A non-zero error code will be
Douglas Gregoraa21cc42010-07-19 21:46:24 +00001480 * returned if reparsing was impossible, such that the translation unit is
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001481 * invalid. In such cases, the only valid call for \c TU is
1482 * \c clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU). The error codes returned by this
1483 * routine are described by the \c CXErrorCode enum.
Douglas Gregoraa21cc42010-07-19 21:46:24 +00001484 */
1485CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_reparseTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit TU,
1486 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001487 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
1488 unsigned options);
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001489
1490/**
1491 * \brief Categorizes how memory is being used by a translation unit.
1492 */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001493enum CXTUResourceUsageKind {
1494 CXTUResourceUsage_AST = 1,
1495 CXTUResourceUsage_Identifiers = 2,
1496 CXTUResourceUsage_Selectors = 3,
1497 CXTUResourceUsage_GlobalCompletionResults = 4,
Ted Kremenek21735e62011-04-28 04:10:31 +00001498 CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManagerContentCache = 5,
Ted Kremenekf5df0ce2011-04-28 04:53:38 +00001499 CXTUResourceUsage_AST_SideTables = 6,
Ted Kremenek8d587902011-04-28 20:36:42 +00001500 CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_Membuffer_Malloc = 7,
Ted Kremenek5e1ed7b2011-04-28 23:46:20 +00001501 CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_Membuffer_MMap = 8,
1502 CXTUResourceUsage_ExternalASTSource_Membuffer_Malloc = 9,
1503 CXTUResourceUsage_ExternalASTSource_Membuffer_MMap = 10,
Ted Kremenek2160a0d2011-05-04 01:38:46 +00001504 CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor = 11,
1505 CXTUResourceUsage_PreprocessingRecord = 12,
Ted Kremenek120992a2011-07-26 23:46:06 +00001506 CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_DataStructures = 13,
Ted Kremenekfbcce6f2011-07-26 23:46:11 +00001507 CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch = 14,
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001508 CXTUResourceUsage_MEMORY_IN_BYTES_BEGIN = CXTUResourceUsage_AST,
1509 CXTUResourceUsage_MEMORY_IN_BYTES_END =
Ted Kremenekfbcce6f2011-07-26 23:46:11 +00001510 CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch,
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001511
1512 CXTUResourceUsage_First = CXTUResourceUsage_AST,
Ted Kremenekfbcce6f2011-07-26 23:46:11 +00001513 CXTUResourceUsage_Last = CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001514};
1515
1516/**
1517 * \brief Returns the human-readable null-terminated C string that represents
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001518 * the name of the memory category. This string should never be freed.
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001519 */
1520CINDEX_LINKAGE
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001521const char *clang_getTUResourceUsageName(enum CXTUResourceUsageKind kind);
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001522
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001523typedef struct CXTUResourceUsageEntry {
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001524 /* \brief The memory usage category. */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001525 enum CXTUResourceUsageKind kind;
1526 /* \brief Amount of resources used.
1527 The units will depend on the resource kind. */
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001528 unsigned long amount;
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001529} CXTUResourceUsageEntry;
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001530
1531/**
1532 * \brief The memory usage of a CXTranslationUnit, broken into categories.
1533 */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001534typedef struct CXTUResourceUsage {
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001535 /* \brief Private data member, used for queries. */
1536 void *data;
1537
1538 /* \brief The number of entries in the 'entries' array. */
1539 unsigned numEntries;
1540
1541 /* \brief An array of key-value pairs, representing the breakdown of memory
1542 usage. */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001543 CXTUResourceUsageEntry *entries;
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001544
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001545} CXTUResourceUsage;
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001546
1547/**
1548 * \brief Return the memory usage of a translation unit. This object
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001549 * should be released with clang_disposeCXTUResourceUsage().
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001550 */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001551CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTUResourceUsage clang_getCXTUResourceUsage(CXTranslationUnit TU);
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001552
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001553CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeCXTUResourceUsage(CXTUResourceUsage usage);
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001554
Douglas Gregoraa21cc42010-07-19 21:46:24 +00001555/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001556 * @}
1557 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001558
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001559/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001560 * \brief Describes the kind of entity that a cursor refers to.
1561 */
1562enum CXCursorKind {
1563 /* Declarations */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001564 /**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001565 * \brief A declaration whose specific kind is not exposed via this
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001566 * interface.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001567 *
1568 * Unexposed declarations have the same operations as any other kind
1569 * of declaration; one can extract their location information,
1570 * spelling, find their definitions, etc. However, the specific kind
1571 * of the declaration is not reported.
1572 */
1573 CXCursor_UnexposedDecl = 1,
1574 /** \brief A C or C++ struct. */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001575 CXCursor_StructDecl = 2,
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001576 /** \brief A C or C++ union. */
1577 CXCursor_UnionDecl = 3,
1578 /** \brief A C++ class. */
1579 CXCursor_ClassDecl = 4,
1580 /** \brief An enumeration. */
1581 CXCursor_EnumDecl = 5,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001582 /**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001583 * \brief A field (in C) or non-static data member (in C++) in a
1584 * struct, union, or C++ class.
1585 */
1586 CXCursor_FieldDecl = 6,
1587 /** \brief An enumerator constant. */
1588 CXCursor_EnumConstantDecl = 7,
1589 /** \brief A function. */
1590 CXCursor_FunctionDecl = 8,
1591 /** \brief A variable. */
1592 CXCursor_VarDecl = 9,
1593 /** \brief A function or method parameter. */
1594 CXCursor_ParmDecl = 10,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001595 /** \brief An Objective-C \@interface. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001596 CXCursor_ObjCInterfaceDecl = 11,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001597 /** \brief An Objective-C \@interface for a category. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001598 CXCursor_ObjCCategoryDecl = 12,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001599 /** \brief An Objective-C \@protocol declaration. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001600 CXCursor_ObjCProtocolDecl = 13,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001601 /** \brief An Objective-C \@property declaration. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001602 CXCursor_ObjCPropertyDecl = 14,
1603 /** \brief An Objective-C instance variable. */
1604 CXCursor_ObjCIvarDecl = 15,
1605 /** \brief An Objective-C instance method. */
1606 CXCursor_ObjCInstanceMethodDecl = 16,
1607 /** \brief An Objective-C class method. */
1608 CXCursor_ObjCClassMethodDecl = 17,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001609 /** \brief An Objective-C \@implementation. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001610 CXCursor_ObjCImplementationDecl = 18,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001611 /** \brief An Objective-C \@implementation for a category. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001612 CXCursor_ObjCCategoryImplDecl = 19,
Saleem Abdulrasool993b2862015-08-12 03:21:44 +00001613 /** \brief A typedef. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001614 CXCursor_TypedefDecl = 20,
Ted Kremenek225b8e32010-04-13 23:39:06 +00001615 /** \brief A C++ class method. */
1616 CXCursor_CXXMethod = 21,
Ted Kremenekbd67fb22010-05-06 23:38:21 +00001617 /** \brief A C++ namespace. */
1618 CXCursor_Namespace = 22,
Ted Kremenekb80cba52010-05-07 01:04:29 +00001619 /** \brief A linkage specification, e.g. 'extern "C"'. */
1620 CXCursor_LinkageSpec = 23,
Douglas Gregor12bca222010-08-31 14:41:23 +00001621 /** \brief A C++ constructor. */
1622 CXCursor_Constructor = 24,
1623 /** \brief A C++ destructor. */
1624 CXCursor_Destructor = 25,
1625 /** \brief A C++ conversion function. */
1626 CXCursor_ConversionFunction = 26,
Douglas Gregor713602b2010-08-31 17:01:39 +00001627 /** \brief A C++ template type parameter. */
1628 CXCursor_TemplateTypeParameter = 27,
1629 /** \brief A C++ non-type template parameter. */
1630 CXCursor_NonTypeTemplateParameter = 28,
1631 /** \brief A C++ template template parameter. */
1632 CXCursor_TemplateTemplateParameter = 29,
1633 /** \brief A C++ function template. */
1634 CXCursor_FunctionTemplate = 30,
Douglas Gregor1fbaeb12010-08-31 19:02:00 +00001635 /** \brief A C++ class template. */
1636 CXCursor_ClassTemplate = 31,
Douglas Gregorf96abb22010-08-31 19:31:58 +00001637 /** \brief A C++ class template partial specialization. */
1638 CXCursor_ClassTemplatePartialSpecialization = 32,
Douglas Gregora89314e2010-08-31 23:48:11 +00001639 /** \brief A C++ namespace alias declaration. */
1640 CXCursor_NamespaceAlias = 33,
Douglas Gregor01a430132010-09-01 03:07:18 +00001641 /** \brief A C++ using directive. */
1642 CXCursor_UsingDirective = 34,
Richard Smithdda56e42011-04-15 14:24:37 +00001643 /** \brief A C++ using declaration. */
Douglas Gregora9aa29c2010-09-01 19:52:22 +00001644 CXCursor_UsingDeclaration = 35,
Richard Smithdda56e42011-04-15 14:24:37 +00001645 /** \brief A C++ alias declaration */
1646 CXCursor_TypeAliasDecl = 36,
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001647 /** \brief An Objective-C \@synthesize definition. */
Douglas Gregor4cd65962011-06-03 23:08:58 +00001648 CXCursor_ObjCSynthesizeDecl = 37,
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001649 /** \brief An Objective-C \@dynamic definition. */
Douglas Gregor4cd65962011-06-03 23:08:58 +00001650 CXCursor_ObjCDynamicDecl = 38,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis12afd702011-09-30 17:58:23 +00001651 /** \brief An access specifier. */
1652 CXCursor_CXXAccessSpecifier = 39,
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001653
Ted Kremenek08de5c12010-05-19 21:51:10 +00001654 CXCursor_FirstDecl = CXCursor_UnexposedDecl,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis12afd702011-09-30 17:58:23 +00001655 CXCursor_LastDecl = CXCursor_CXXAccessSpecifier,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001656
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001657 /* References */
1658 CXCursor_FirstRef = 40, /* Decl references */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001659 CXCursor_ObjCSuperClassRef = 40,
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001660 CXCursor_ObjCProtocolRef = 41,
1661 CXCursor_ObjCClassRef = 42,
1662 /**
1663 * \brief A reference to a type declaration.
1664 *
1665 * A type reference occurs anywhere where a type is named but not
1666 * declared. For example, given:
1667 *
1668 * \code
1669 * typedef unsigned size_type;
1670 * size_type size;
1671 * \endcode
1672 *
1673 * The typedef is a declaration of size_type (CXCursor_TypedefDecl),
1674 * while the type of the variable "size" is referenced. The cursor
1675 * referenced by the type of size is the typedef for size_type.
1676 */
1677 CXCursor_TypeRef = 43,
Ted Kremenekae9e2212010-08-27 21:34:58 +00001678 CXCursor_CXXBaseSpecifier = 44,
Douglas Gregora23e8f72010-08-31 20:37:03 +00001679 /**
Douglas Gregorf3af3112010-09-09 21:42:20 +00001680 * \brief A reference to a class template, function template, template
1681 * template parameter, or class template partial specialization.
Douglas Gregora23e8f72010-08-31 20:37:03 +00001682 */
1683 CXCursor_TemplateRef = 45,
Douglas Gregora89314e2010-08-31 23:48:11 +00001684 /**
1685 * \brief A reference to a namespace or namespace alias.
1686 */
1687 CXCursor_NamespaceRef = 46,
Douglas Gregorf3af3112010-09-09 21:42:20 +00001688 /**
Douglas Gregora93ab662010-09-10 00:22:18 +00001689 * \brief A reference to a member of a struct, union, or class that occurs in
1690 * some non-expression context, e.g., a designated initializer.
Douglas Gregorf3af3112010-09-09 21:42:20 +00001691 */
1692 CXCursor_MemberRef = 47,
Douglas Gregora93ab662010-09-10 00:22:18 +00001693 /**
1694 * \brief A reference to a labeled statement.
1695 *
1696 * This cursor kind is used to describe the jump to "start_over" in the
1697 * goto statement in the following example:
1698 *
1699 * \code
1700 * start_over:
1701 * ++counter;
1702 *
1703 * goto start_over;
1704 * \endcode
1705 *
1706 * A label reference cursor refers to a label statement.
1707 */
1708 CXCursor_LabelRef = 48,
1709
Douglas Gregor16a2bdd2010-09-13 22:52:57 +00001710 /**
1711 * \brief A reference to a set of overloaded functions or function templates
1712 * that has not yet been resolved to a specific function or function template.
1713 *
1714 * An overloaded declaration reference cursor occurs in C++ templates where
1715 * a dependent name refers to a function. For example:
1716 *
1717 * \code
1718 * template<typename T> void swap(T&, T&);
1719 *
1720 * struct X { ... };
1721 * void swap(X&, X&);
1722 *
1723 * template<typename T>
1724 * void reverse(T* first, T* last) {
1725 * while (first < last - 1) {
1726 * swap(*first, *--last);
1727 * ++first;
1728 * }
1729 * }
1730 *
1731 * struct Y { };
1732 * void swap(Y&, Y&);
1733 * \endcode
1734 *
1735 * Here, the identifier "swap" is associated with an overloaded declaration
1736 * reference. In the template definition, "swap" refers to either of the two
1737 * "swap" functions declared above, so both results will be available. At
1738 * instantiation time, "swap" may also refer to other functions found via
1739 * argument-dependent lookup (e.g., the "swap" function at the end of the
1740 * example).
1741 *
1742 * The functions \c clang_getNumOverloadedDecls() and
1743 * \c clang_getOverloadedDecl() can be used to retrieve the definitions
1744 * referenced by this cursor.
1745 */
1746 CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef = 49,
1747
Douglas Gregor30093832012-02-15 00:54:55 +00001748 /**
1749 * \brief A reference to a variable that occurs in some non-expression
1750 * context, e.g., a C++ lambda capture list.
1751 */
1752 CXCursor_VariableRef = 50,
1753
1754 CXCursor_LastRef = CXCursor_VariableRef,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001755
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001756 /* Error conditions */
1757 CXCursor_FirstInvalid = 70,
1758 CXCursor_InvalidFile = 70,
1759 CXCursor_NoDeclFound = 71,
1760 CXCursor_NotImplemented = 72,
Ted Kremeneke184ac52010-03-19 20:39:03 +00001761 CXCursor_InvalidCode = 73,
1762 CXCursor_LastInvalid = CXCursor_InvalidCode,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001763
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001764 /* Expressions */
1765 CXCursor_FirstExpr = 100,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001766
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001767 /**
1768 * \brief An expression whose specific kind is not exposed via this
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001769 * interface.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001770 *
1771 * Unexposed expressions have the same operations as any other kind
1772 * of expression; one can extract their location information,
1773 * spelling, children, etc. However, the specific kind of the
1774 * expression is not reported.
1775 */
1776 CXCursor_UnexposedExpr = 100,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001777
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001778 /**
1779 * \brief An expression that refers to some value declaration, such
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00001780 * as a function, variable, or enumerator.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001781 */
1782 CXCursor_DeclRefExpr = 101,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001783
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001784 /**
1785 * \brief An expression that refers to a member of a struct, union,
1786 * class, Objective-C class, etc.
1787 */
1788 CXCursor_MemberRefExpr = 102,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001789
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001790 /** \brief An expression that calls a function. */
1791 CXCursor_CallExpr = 103,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001792
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001793 /** \brief An expression that sends a message to an Objective-C
1794 object or class. */
1795 CXCursor_ObjCMessageExpr = 104,
Ted Kremenek33b9a422010-04-11 21:47:37 +00001796
1797 /** \brief An expression that represents a block literal. */
1798 CXCursor_BlockExpr = 105,
1799
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001800 /** \brief An integer literal.
1801 */
1802 CXCursor_IntegerLiteral = 106,
1803
1804 /** \brief A floating point number literal.
1805 */
1806 CXCursor_FloatingLiteral = 107,
1807
1808 /** \brief An imaginary number literal.
1809 */
1810 CXCursor_ImaginaryLiteral = 108,
1811
1812 /** \brief A string literal.
1813 */
1814 CXCursor_StringLiteral = 109,
1815
1816 /** \brief A character literal.
1817 */
1818 CXCursor_CharacterLiteral = 110,
1819
1820 /** \brief A parenthesized expression, e.g. "(1)".
1821 *
1822 * This AST node is only formed if full location information is requested.
1823 */
1824 CXCursor_ParenExpr = 111,
1825
1826 /** \brief This represents the unary-expression's (except sizeof and
1827 * alignof).
1828 */
1829 CXCursor_UnaryOperator = 112,
1830
1831 /** \brief [C99 6.5.2.1] Array Subscripting.
1832 */
1833 CXCursor_ArraySubscriptExpr = 113,
1834
1835 /** \brief A builtin binary operation expression such as "x + y" or
1836 * "x <= y".
1837 */
1838 CXCursor_BinaryOperator = 114,
1839
1840 /** \brief Compound assignment such as "+=".
1841 */
1842 CXCursor_CompoundAssignOperator = 115,
1843
1844 /** \brief The ?: ternary operator.
1845 */
1846 CXCursor_ConditionalOperator = 116,
1847
1848 /** \brief An explicit cast in C (C99 6.5.4) or a C-style cast in C++
1849 * (C++ [expr.cast]), which uses the syntax (Type)expr.
1850 *
1851 * For example: (int)f.
1852 */
1853 CXCursor_CStyleCastExpr = 117,
1854
1855 /** \brief [C99 6.5.2.5]
1856 */
1857 CXCursor_CompoundLiteralExpr = 118,
1858
1859 /** \brief Describes an C or C++ initializer list.
1860 */
1861 CXCursor_InitListExpr = 119,
1862
1863 /** \brief The GNU address of label extension, representing &&label.
1864 */
1865 CXCursor_AddrLabelExpr = 120,
1866
1867 /** \brief This is the GNU Statement Expression extension: ({int X=4; X;})
1868 */
1869 CXCursor_StmtExpr = 121,
1870
Benjamin Kramere56f3932011-12-23 17:00:35 +00001871 /** \brief Represents a C11 generic selection.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001872 */
1873 CXCursor_GenericSelectionExpr = 122,
1874
1875 /** \brief Implements the GNU __null extension, which is a name for a null
1876 * pointer constant that has integral type (e.g., int or long) and is the same
1877 * size and alignment as a pointer.
1878 *
1879 * The __null extension is typically only used by system headers, which define
1880 * NULL as __null in C++ rather than using 0 (which is an integer that may not
1881 * match the size of a pointer).
1882 */
1883 CXCursor_GNUNullExpr = 123,
1884
1885 /** \brief C++'s static_cast<> expression.
1886 */
1887 CXCursor_CXXStaticCastExpr = 124,
1888
1889 /** \brief C++'s dynamic_cast<> expression.
1890 */
1891 CXCursor_CXXDynamicCastExpr = 125,
1892
1893 /** \brief C++'s reinterpret_cast<> expression.
1894 */
1895 CXCursor_CXXReinterpretCastExpr = 126,
1896
1897 /** \brief C++'s const_cast<> expression.
1898 */
1899 CXCursor_CXXConstCastExpr = 127,
1900
1901 /** \brief Represents an explicit C++ type conversion that uses "functional"
1902 * notion (C++ [expr.type.conv]).
1903 *
1904 * Example:
1905 * \code
1906 * x = int(0.5);
1907 * \endcode
1908 */
1909 CXCursor_CXXFunctionalCastExpr = 128,
1910
1911 /** \brief A C++ typeid expression (C++ [expr.typeid]).
1912 */
1913 CXCursor_CXXTypeidExpr = 129,
1914
1915 /** \brief [C++ 2.13.5] C++ Boolean Literal.
1916 */
1917 CXCursor_CXXBoolLiteralExpr = 130,
1918
1919 /** \brief [C++0x 2.14.7] C++ Pointer Literal.
1920 */
1921 CXCursor_CXXNullPtrLiteralExpr = 131,
1922
1923 /** \brief Represents the "this" expression in C++
1924 */
1925 CXCursor_CXXThisExpr = 132,
1926
1927 /** \brief [C++ 15] C++ Throw Expression.
1928 *
1929 * This handles 'throw' and 'throw' assignment-expression. When
1930 * assignment-expression isn't present, Op will be null.
1931 */
1932 CXCursor_CXXThrowExpr = 133,
1933
1934 /** \brief A new expression for memory allocation and constructor calls, e.g:
1935 * "new CXXNewExpr(foo)".
1936 */
1937 CXCursor_CXXNewExpr = 134,
1938
1939 /** \brief A delete expression for memory deallocation and destructor calls,
1940 * e.g. "delete[] pArray".
1941 */
1942 CXCursor_CXXDeleteExpr = 135,
1943
Olivier Goffart692d5332016-06-09 16:16:06 +00001944 /** \brief A unary expression. (noexcept, sizeof, or other traits)
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001945 */
1946 CXCursor_UnaryExpr = 136,
1947
Douglas Gregor910c37c2011-11-11 22:35:18 +00001948 /** \brief An Objective-C string literal i.e. @"foo".
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001949 */
1950 CXCursor_ObjCStringLiteral = 137,
1951
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001952 /** \brief An Objective-C \@encode expression.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001953 */
1954 CXCursor_ObjCEncodeExpr = 138,
1955
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001956 /** \brief An Objective-C \@selector expression.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001957 */
1958 CXCursor_ObjCSelectorExpr = 139,
1959
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001960 /** \brief An Objective-C \@protocol expression.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001961 */
1962 CXCursor_ObjCProtocolExpr = 140,
1963
1964 /** \brief An Objective-C "bridged" cast expression, which casts between
1965 * Objective-C pointers and C pointers, transferring ownership in the process.
1966 *
1967 * \code
1968 * NSString *str = (__bridge_transfer NSString *)CFCreateString();
1969 * \endcode
1970 */
1971 CXCursor_ObjCBridgedCastExpr = 141,
1972
1973 /** \brief Represents a C++0x pack expansion that produces a sequence of
1974 * expressions.
1975 *
1976 * A pack expansion expression contains a pattern (which itself is an
1977 * expression) followed by an ellipsis. For example:
1978 *
1979 * \code
1980 * template<typename F, typename ...Types>
1981 * void forward(F f, Types &&...args) {
1982 * f(static_cast<Types&&>(args)...);
1983 * }
1984 * \endcode
1985 */
1986 CXCursor_PackExpansionExpr = 142,
1987
1988 /** \brief Represents an expression that computes the length of a parameter
1989 * pack.
1990 *
1991 * \code
1992 * template<typename ...Types>
1993 * struct count {
1994 * static const unsigned value = sizeof...(Types);
1995 * };
1996 * \endcode
1997 */
1998 CXCursor_SizeOfPackExpr = 143,
1999
Douglas Gregor30093832012-02-15 00:54:55 +00002000 /* \brief Represents a C++ lambda expression that produces a local function
2001 * object.
2002 *
2003 * \code
2004 * void abssort(float *x, unsigned N) {
2005 * std::sort(x, x + N,
2006 * [](float a, float b) {
2007 * return std::abs(a) < std::abs(b);
2008 * });
2009 * }
2010 * \endcode
2011 */
2012 CXCursor_LambdaExpr = 144,
2013
Ted Kremenek77006f62012-03-06 20:06:06 +00002014 /** \brief Objective-c Boolean Literal.
2015 */
2016 CXCursor_ObjCBoolLiteralExpr = 145,
2017
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002018 /** \brief Represents the "self" expression in an Objective-C method.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisc2233be2013-04-23 17:57:17 +00002019 */
2020 CXCursor_ObjCSelfExpr = 146,
2021
Alexey Bataev1a3320e2015-08-25 14:24:04 +00002022 /** \brief OpenMP 4.0 [2.4, Array Section].
2023 */
2024 CXCursor_OMPArraySectionExpr = 147,
2025
Erik Pilkington29099de2016-07-16 00:35:23 +00002026 /** \brief Represents an @available(...) check.
2027 */
2028 CXCursor_ObjCAvailabilityCheckExpr = 148,
2029
2030 CXCursor_LastExpr = CXCursor_ObjCAvailabilityCheckExpr,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002031
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002032 /* Statements */
2033 CXCursor_FirstStmt = 200,
2034 /**
2035 * \brief A statement whose specific kind is not exposed via this
2036 * interface.
2037 *
2038 * Unexposed statements have the same operations as any other kind of
2039 * statement; one can extract their location information, spelling,
2040 * children, etc. However, the specific kind of the statement is not
2041 * reported.
2042 */
2043 CXCursor_UnexposedStmt = 200,
Douglas Gregora93ab662010-09-10 00:22:18 +00002044
2045 /** \brief A labelled statement in a function.
2046 *
2047 * This cursor kind is used to describe the "start_over:" label statement in
2048 * the following example:
2049 *
2050 * \code
2051 * start_over:
2052 * ++counter;
2053 * \endcode
2054 *
2055 */
2056 CXCursor_LabelStmt = 201,
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002057
2058 /** \brief A group of statements like { stmt stmt }.
2059 *
2060 * This cursor kind is used to describe compound statements, e.g. function
2061 * bodies.
2062 */
2063 CXCursor_CompoundStmt = 202,
2064
Benjamin Kramer2501f142013-10-20 11:47:15 +00002065 /** \brief A case statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002066 */
2067 CXCursor_CaseStmt = 203,
2068
2069 /** \brief A default statement.
2070 */
2071 CXCursor_DefaultStmt = 204,
2072
2073 /** \brief An if statement
2074 */
2075 CXCursor_IfStmt = 205,
2076
2077 /** \brief A switch statement.
2078 */
2079 CXCursor_SwitchStmt = 206,
2080
2081 /** \brief A while statement.
2082 */
2083 CXCursor_WhileStmt = 207,
2084
2085 /** \brief A do statement.
2086 */
2087 CXCursor_DoStmt = 208,
2088
2089 /** \brief A for statement.
2090 */
2091 CXCursor_ForStmt = 209,
2092
2093 /** \brief A goto statement.
2094 */
2095 CXCursor_GotoStmt = 210,
2096
2097 /** \brief An indirect goto statement.
2098 */
2099 CXCursor_IndirectGotoStmt = 211,
2100
2101 /** \brief A continue statement.
2102 */
2103 CXCursor_ContinueStmt = 212,
2104
2105 /** \brief A break statement.
2106 */
2107 CXCursor_BreakStmt = 213,
2108
2109 /** \brief A return statement.
2110 */
2111 CXCursor_ReturnStmt = 214,
2112
Chad Rosierde70e0e2012-08-25 00:11:56 +00002113 /** \brief A GCC inline assembly statement extension.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002114 */
Chad Rosierde70e0e2012-08-25 00:11:56 +00002115 CXCursor_GCCAsmStmt = 215,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5eae0732012-09-24 19:27:20 +00002116 CXCursor_AsmStmt = CXCursor_GCCAsmStmt,
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002117
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002118 /** \brief Objective-C's overall \@try-\@catch-\@finally statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002119 */
2120 CXCursor_ObjCAtTryStmt = 216,
2121
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002122 /** \brief Objective-C's \@catch statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002123 */
2124 CXCursor_ObjCAtCatchStmt = 217,
2125
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002126 /** \brief Objective-C's \@finally statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002127 */
2128 CXCursor_ObjCAtFinallyStmt = 218,
2129
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002130 /** \brief Objective-C's \@throw statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002131 */
2132 CXCursor_ObjCAtThrowStmt = 219,
2133
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002134 /** \brief Objective-C's \@synchronized statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002135 */
2136 CXCursor_ObjCAtSynchronizedStmt = 220,
2137
2138 /** \brief Objective-C's autorelease pool statement.
2139 */
2140 CXCursor_ObjCAutoreleasePoolStmt = 221,
2141
2142 /** \brief Objective-C's collection statement.
2143 */
2144 CXCursor_ObjCForCollectionStmt = 222,
2145
2146 /** \brief C++'s catch statement.
2147 */
2148 CXCursor_CXXCatchStmt = 223,
2149
2150 /** \brief C++'s try statement.
2151 */
2152 CXCursor_CXXTryStmt = 224,
2153
2154 /** \brief C++'s for (* : *) statement.
2155 */
2156 CXCursor_CXXForRangeStmt = 225,
2157
2158 /** \brief Windows Structured Exception Handling's try statement.
2159 */
2160 CXCursor_SEHTryStmt = 226,
2161
2162 /** \brief Windows Structured Exception Handling's except statement.
2163 */
2164 CXCursor_SEHExceptStmt = 227,
2165
2166 /** \brief Windows Structured Exception Handling's finally statement.
2167 */
2168 CXCursor_SEHFinallyStmt = 228,
2169
Chad Rosier32503022012-06-11 20:47:18 +00002170 /** \brief A MS inline assembly statement extension.
2171 */
2172 CXCursor_MSAsmStmt = 229,
2173
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00002174 /** \brief The null statement ";": C99 6.8.3p3.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002175 *
2176 * This cursor kind is used to describe the null statement.
2177 */
2178 CXCursor_NullStmt = 230,
2179
2180 /** \brief Adaptor class for mixing declarations with statements and
2181 * expressions.
2182 */
2183 CXCursor_DeclStmt = 231,
2184
Alexey Bataev5ec3eb12013-07-19 03:13:43 +00002185 /** \brief OpenMP parallel directive.
2186 */
2187 CXCursor_OMPParallelDirective = 232,
2188
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00002189 /** \brief OpenMP SIMD directive.
Alexey Bataev1b59ab52014-02-27 08:29:12 +00002190 */
2191 CXCursor_OMPSimdDirective = 233,
2192
Alexey Bataevf29276e2014-06-18 04:14:57 +00002193 /** \brief OpenMP for directive.
2194 */
2195 CXCursor_OMPForDirective = 234,
2196
Alexey Bataevd3f8dd22014-06-25 11:44:49 +00002197 /** \brief OpenMP sections directive.
2198 */
2199 CXCursor_OMPSectionsDirective = 235,
2200
Alexey Bataev1e0498a2014-06-26 08:21:58 +00002201 /** \brief OpenMP section directive.
2202 */
2203 CXCursor_OMPSectionDirective = 236,
2204
Alexey Bataevd1e40fb2014-06-26 12:05:45 +00002205 /** \brief OpenMP single directive.
2206 */
2207 CXCursor_OMPSingleDirective = 237,
2208
Alexey Bataev4acb8592014-07-07 13:01:15 +00002209 /** \brief OpenMP parallel for directive.
2210 */
2211 CXCursor_OMPParallelForDirective = 238,
2212
Alexey Bataev84d0b3e2014-07-08 08:12:03 +00002213 /** \brief OpenMP parallel sections directive.
2214 */
2215 CXCursor_OMPParallelSectionsDirective = 239,
2216
Alexey Bataev9c2e8ee2014-07-11 11:25:16 +00002217 /** \brief OpenMP task directive.
2218 */
2219 CXCursor_OMPTaskDirective = 240,
2220
Alexander Musman80c22892014-07-17 08:54:58 +00002221 /** \brief OpenMP master directive.
2222 */
2223 CXCursor_OMPMasterDirective = 241,
2224
Alexander Musmand9ed09f2014-07-21 09:42:05 +00002225 /** \brief OpenMP critical directive.
2226 */
2227 CXCursor_OMPCriticalDirective = 242,
2228
Alexey Bataev68446b72014-07-18 07:47:19 +00002229 /** \brief OpenMP taskyield directive.
2230 */
Alexander Musmand9ed09f2014-07-21 09:42:05 +00002231 CXCursor_OMPTaskyieldDirective = 243,
Alexey Bataev68446b72014-07-18 07:47:19 +00002232
Alexey Bataev4d1dfea2014-07-18 09:11:51 +00002233 /** \brief OpenMP barrier directive.
2234 */
Alexander Musmand9ed09f2014-07-21 09:42:05 +00002235 CXCursor_OMPBarrierDirective = 244,
Alexey Bataev4d1dfea2014-07-18 09:11:51 +00002236
Alexey Bataev2df347a2014-07-18 10:17:07 +00002237 /** \brief OpenMP taskwait directive.
2238 */
Alexander Musmand9ed09f2014-07-21 09:42:05 +00002239 CXCursor_OMPTaskwaitDirective = 245,
Alexey Bataev2df347a2014-07-18 10:17:07 +00002240
Alexey Bataev6125da92014-07-21 11:26:11 +00002241 /** \brief OpenMP flush directive.
2242 */
2243 CXCursor_OMPFlushDirective = 246,
Alexey Bataev0162e452014-07-22 10:10:35 +00002244
Reid Klecknerba764482014-07-24 18:22:15 +00002245 /** \brief Windows Structured Exception Handling's leave statement.
2246 */
2247 CXCursor_SEHLeaveStmt = 247,
2248
Alexey Bataev9fb6e642014-07-22 06:45:04 +00002249 /** \brief OpenMP ordered directive.
2250 */
Reid Klecknerba764482014-07-24 18:22:15 +00002251 CXCursor_OMPOrderedDirective = 248,
Alexey Bataev6125da92014-07-21 11:26:11 +00002252
Alexey Bataev0162e452014-07-22 10:10:35 +00002253 /** \brief OpenMP atomic directive.
2254 */
Reid Klecknerba764482014-07-24 18:22:15 +00002255 CXCursor_OMPAtomicDirective = 249,
Alexey Bataev0162e452014-07-22 10:10:35 +00002256
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00002257 /** \brief OpenMP for SIMD directive.
Alexander Musmanf82886e2014-09-18 05:12:34 +00002258 */
2259 CXCursor_OMPForSimdDirective = 250,
2260
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00002261 /** \brief OpenMP parallel for SIMD directive.
Alexander Musmane4e893b2014-09-23 09:33:00 +00002262 */
2263 CXCursor_OMPParallelForSimdDirective = 251,
2264
Alexey Bataev0bd520b2014-09-19 08:19:49 +00002265 /** \brief OpenMP target directive.
2266 */
Alexander Musmane4e893b2014-09-23 09:33:00 +00002267 CXCursor_OMPTargetDirective = 252,
Alexey Bataev0bd520b2014-09-19 08:19:49 +00002268
Alexey Bataev13314bf2014-10-09 04:18:56 +00002269 /** \brief OpenMP teams directive.
2270 */
2271 CXCursor_OMPTeamsDirective = 253,
2272
Alexey Bataev6d4ed052015-07-01 06:57:41 +00002273 /** \brief OpenMP taskgroup directive.
Alexey Bataevc30dd2d2015-06-18 12:14:09 +00002274 */
Michael Wong65f367f2015-07-21 13:44:28 +00002275 CXCursor_OMPTaskgroupDirective = 254,
Alexey Bataevc30dd2d2015-06-18 12:14:09 +00002276
Alexey Bataev6d4ed052015-07-01 06:57:41 +00002277 /** \brief OpenMP cancellation point directive.
2278 */
Michael Wong65f367f2015-07-21 13:44:28 +00002279 CXCursor_OMPCancellationPointDirective = 255,
Alexey Bataevc30dd2d2015-06-18 12:14:09 +00002280
Alexey Bataev80909872015-07-02 11:25:17 +00002281 /** \brief OpenMP cancel directive.
2282 */
Michael Wong65f367f2015-07-21 13:44:28 +00002283 CXCursor_OMPCancelDirective = 256,
Alexey Bataev80909872015-07-02 11:25:17 +00002284
Michael Wong65f367f2015-07-21 13:44:28 +00002285 /** \brief OpenMP target data directive.
2286 */
2287 CXCursor_OMPTargetDataDirective = 257,
2288
Alexey Bataev49f6e782015-12-01 04:18:41 +00002289 /** \brief OpenMP taskloop directive.
2290 */
2291 CXCursor_OMPTaskLoopDirective = 258,
2292
Alexey Bataev0a6ed842015-12-03 09:40:15 +00002293 /** \brief OpenMP taskloop simd directive.
2294 */
2295 CXCursor_OMPTaskLoopSimdDirective = 259,
2296
Samuel Antao686c70c2016-05-26 17:30:50 +00002297 /** \brief OpenMP distribute directive.
Carlo Bertolli6200a3d2015-12-14 14:51:25 +00002298 */
2299 CXCursor_OMPDistributeDirective = 260,
2300
Samuel Antaodf67fc42016-01-19 19:15:56 +00002301 /** \brief OpenMP target enter data directive.
2302 */
2303 CXCursor_OMPTargetEnterDataDirective = 261,
2304
Samuel Antao72590762016-01-19 20:04:50 +00002305 /** \brief OpenMP target exit data directive.
2306 */
2307 CXCursor_OMPTargetExitDataDirective = 262,
2308
Arpith Chacko Jacobe955b3d2016-01-26 18:48:41 +00002309 /** \brief OpenMP target parallel directive.
2310 */
2311 CXCursor_OMPTargetParallelDirective = 263,
2312
Arpith Chacko Jacob05bebb52016-02-03 15:46:42 +00002313 /** \brief OpenMP target parallel for directive.
2314 */
2315 CXCursor_OMPTargetParallelForDirective = 264,
2316
Samuel Antao686c70c2016-05-26 17:30:50 +00002317 /** \brief OpenMP target update directive.
2318 */
2319 CXCursor_OMPTargetUpdateDirective = 265,
2320
Carlo Bertolli9925f152016-06-27 14:55:37 +00002321 /** \brief OpenMP distribute parallel for directive.
2322 */
2323 CXCursor_OMPDistributeParallelForDirective = 266,
2324
Kelvin Li4a39add2016-07-05 05:00:15 +00002325 /** \brief OpenMP distribute parallel for simd directive.
2326 */
2327 CXCursor_OMPDistributeParallelForSimdDirective = 267,
2328
Kelvin Li787f3fc2016-07-06 04:45:38 +00002329 /** \brief OpenMP distribute simd directive.
2330 */
2331 CXCursor_OMPDistributeSimdDirective = 268,
2332
Kelvin Lia579b912016-07-14 02:54:56 +00002333 /** \brief OpenMP target parallel for simd directive.
2334 */
2335 CXCursor_OMPTargetParallelForSimdDirective = 269,
2336
Kelvin Li986330c2016-07-20 22:57:10 +00002337 /** \brief OpenMP target simd directive.
2338 */
2339 CXCursor_OMPTargetSimdDirective = 270,
2340
Kelvin Li02532872016-08-05 14:37:37 +00002341 /** \brief OpenMP teams distribute directive.
2342 */
2343 CXCursor_OMPTeamsDistributeDirective = 271,
2344
Kelvin Li4e325f72016-10-25 12:50:55 +00002345 /** \brief OpenMP teams distribute simd directive.
2346 */
2347 CXCursor_OMPTeamsDistributeSimdDirective = 272,
2348
Kelvin Li579e41c2016-11-30 23:51:03 +00002349 /** \brief OpenMP teams distribute parallel for simd directive.
2350 */
2351 CXCursor_OMPTeamsDistributeParallelForSimdDirective = 273,
2352
Kelvin Li7ade93f2016-12-09 03:24:30 +00002353 /** \brief OpenMP teams distribute parallel for directive.
2354 */
2355 CXCursor_OMPTeamsDistributeParallelForDirective = 274,
2356
2357 CXCursor_LastStmt = CXCursor_OMPTeamsDistributeParallelForDirective,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002358
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002359 /**
2360 * \brief Cursor that represents the translation unit itself.
2361 *
2362 * The translation unit cursor exists primarily to act as the root
2363 * cursor for traversing the contents of a translation unit.
2364 */
Ted Kremenekbff31432010-02-18 03:09:07 +00002365 CXCursor_TranslationUnit = 300,
2366
Bill Wendling44426052012-12-20 19:22:21 +00002367 /* Attributes */
Ted Kremenekbff31432010-02-18 03:09:07 +00002368 CXCursor_FirstAttr = 400,
2369 /**
2370 * \brief An attribute whose specific kind is not exposed via this
2371 * interface.
2372 */
2373 CXCursor_UnexposedAttr = 400,
2374
2375 CXCursor_IBActionAttr = 401,
2376 CXCursor_IBOutletAttr = 402,
Ted Kremenek26bde772010-05-19 17:38:06 +00002377 CXCursor_IBOutletCollectionAttr = 403,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2cb4e3c2011-09-13 17:39:31 +00002378 CXCursor_CXXFinalAttr = 404,
2379 CXCursor_CXXOverrideAttr = 405,
Erik Verbruggenca98f2a2011-10-13 09:41:32 +00002380 CXCursor_AnnotateAttr = 406,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002381 CXCursor_AsmLabelAttr = 407,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis16834f12013-09-25 00:14:38 +00002382 CXCursor_PackedAttr = 408,
Joey Gouly81228382014-05-01 15:41:58 +00002383 CXCursor_PureAttr = 409,
2384 CXCursor_ConstAttr = 410,
2385 CXCursor_NoDuplicateAttr = 411,
Eli Bendersky2581e662014-05-28 19:29:58 +00002386 CXCursor_CUDAConstantAttr = 412,
2387 CXCursor_CUDADeviceAttr = 413,
2388 CXCursor_CUDAGlobalAttr = 414,
2389 CXCursor_CUDAHostAttr = 415,
Eli Bendersky9b071472014-08-08 14:59:00 +00002390 CXCursor_CUDASharedAttr = 416,
Saleem Abdulrasool79c69712015-09-05 18:53:43 +00002391 CXCursor_VisibilityAttr = 417,
Saleem Abdulrasool8aa0b802015-12-10 18:45:18 +00002392 CXCursor_DLLExport = 418,
2393 CXCursor_DLLImport = 419,
2394 CXCursor_LastAttr = CXCursor_DLLImport,
Eli Bendersky2581e662014-05-28 19:29:58 +00002395
Douglas Gregor92a524f2010-03-18 00:42:48 +00002396 /* Preprocessing */
2397 CXCursor_PreprocessingDirective = 500,
Douglas Gregor06d6d322010-03-18 18:04:21 +00002398 CXCursor_MacroDefinition = 501,
Chandler Carruth9e4704a2011-07-14 08:41:15 +00002399 CXCursor_MacroExpansion = 502,
2400 CXCursor_MacroInstantiation = CXCursor_MacroExpansion,
Douglas Gregor796d76a2010-10-20 22:00:55 +00002401 CXCursor_InclusionDirective = 503,
Douglas Gregor92a524f2010-03-18 00:42:48 +00002402 CXCursor_FirstPreprocessing = CXCursor_PreprocessingDirective,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis50e5b1d2012-10-05 00:22:24 +00002403 CXCursor_LastPreprocessing = CXCursor_InclusionDirective,
2404
2405 /* Extra Declarations */
2406 /**
2407 * \brief A module import declaration.
2408 */
2409 CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl = 600,
Sergey Kalinichev8f3b1872015-11-15 13:48:32 +00002410 CXCursor_TypeAliasTemplateDecl = 601,
Olivier Goffart81978012016-06-09 16:15:55 +00002411 /**
2412 * \brief A static_assert or _Static_assert node
2413 */
2414 CXCursor_StaticAssert = 602,
Olivier Goffartd211c642016-11-04 06:29:27 +00002415 /**
2416 * \brief a friend declaration.
2417 */
2418 CXCursor_FriendDecl = 603,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis50e5b1d2012-10-05 00:22:24 +00002419 CXCursor_FirstExtraDecl = CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl,
Olivier Goffartd211c642016-11-04 06:29:27 +00002420 CXCursor_LastExtraDecl = CXCursor_FriendDecl,
Francisco Lopes da Silva975a9f62015-01-21 16:24:11 +00002421
2422 /**
2423 * \brief A code completion overload candidate.
2424 */
2425 CXCursor_OverloadCandidate = 700
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002426};
2427
2428/**
2429 * \brief A cursor representing some element in the abstract syntax tree for
2430 * a translation unit.
2431 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002432 * The cursor abstraction unifies the different kinds of entities in a
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002433 * program--declaration, statements, expressions, references to declarations,
2434 * etc.--under a single "cursor" abstraction with a common set of operations.
2435 * Common operation for a cursor include: getting the physical location in
2436 * a source file where the cursor points, getting the name associated with a
2437 * cursor, and retrieving cursors for any child nodes of a particular cursor.
2438 *
2439 * Cursors can be produced in two specific ways.
2440 * clang_getTranslationUnitCursor() produces a cursor for a translation unit,
2441 * from which one can use clang_visitChildren() to explore the rest of the
2442 * translation unit. clang_getCursor() maps from a physical source location
2443 * to the entity that resides at that location, allowing one to map from the
2444 * source code into the AST.
2445 */
2446typedef struct {
2447 enum CXCursorKind kind;
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00002448 int xdata;
Dmitri Gribenkoba2f7462013-01-11 21:01:49 +00002449 const void *data[3];
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002450} CXCursor;
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002451
2452/**
2453 * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_MANIP Cursor manipulations
2454 *
2455 * @{
2456 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002457
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002458/**
2459 * \brief Retrieve the NULL cursor, which represents no entity.
2460 */
2461CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getNullCursor(void);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002462
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002463/**
2464 * \brief Retrieve the cursor that represents the given translation unit.
2465 *
2466 * The translation unit cursor can be used to start traversing the
2467 * various declarations within the given translation unit.
2468 */
2469CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(CXTranslationUnit);
2470
2471/**
2472 * \brief Determine whether two cursors are equivalent.
2473 */
2474CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalCursors(CXCursor, CXCursor);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002475
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002476/**
Dmitri Gribenko8994e0c2012-09-13 13:11:20 +00002477 * \brief Returns non-zero if \p cursor is null.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd6e9fa52011-09-27 00:30:30 +00002478 */
Dmitri Gribenko8994e0c2012-09-13 13:11:20 +00002479CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_isNull(CXCursor cursor);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd6e9fa52011-09-27 00:30:30 +00002480
2481/**
Douglas Gregor06a3f302010-11-20 00:09:34 +00002482 * \brief Compute a hash value for the given cursor.
2483 */
2484CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_hashCursor(CXCursor);
2485
2486/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002487 * \brief Retrieve the kind of the given cursor.
2488 */
2489CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCursorKind clang_getCursorKind(CXCursor);
2490
2491/**
2492 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a declaration.
2493 */
2494CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isDeclaration(enum CXCursorKind);
2495
2496/**
2497 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a simple
2498 * reference.
2499 *
2500 * Note that other kinds of cursors (such as expressions) can also refer to
2501 * other cursors. Use clang_getCursorReferenced() to determine whether a
2502 * particular cursor refers to another entity.
2503 */
2504CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isReference(enum CXCursorKind);
2505
2506/**
2507 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an expression.
2508 */
2509CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isExpression(enum CXCursorKind);
2510
2511/**
2512 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a statement.
2513 */
2514CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isStatement(enum CXCursorKind);
2515
2516/**
Douglas Gregora98034a2011-07-06 03:00:34 +00002517 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an attribute.
2518 */
2519CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isAttribute(enum CXCursorKind);
2520
2521/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00002522 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor has any attributes.
2523 */
2524CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_hasAttrs(CXCursor C);
2525
2526/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002527 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an invalid
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002528 * cursor.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002529 */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002530CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isInvalid(enum CXCursorKind);
2531
2532/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002533 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a translation
2534 * unit.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002535 */
2536CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isTranslationUnit(enum CXCursorKind);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002537
Ted Kremenekff9021b2010-03-08 21:17:29 +00002538/***
Douglas Gregor92a524f2010-03-18 00:42:48 +00002539 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor represents a preprocessing
2540 * element, such as a preprocessor directive or macro instantiation.
2541 */
2542CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isPreprocessing(enum CXCursorKind);
2543
2544/***
Ted Kremenekff9021b2010-03-08 21:17:29 +00002545 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor represents a currently
2546 * unexposed piece of the AST (e.g., CXCursor_UnexposedStmt).
2547 */
2548CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isUnexposed(enum CXCursorKind);
2549
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002550/**
Ted Kremenekfb4961d2010-03-03 06:36:57 +00002551 * \brief Describe the linkage of the entity referred to by a cursor.
2552 */
2553enum CXLinkageKind {
2554 /** \brief This value indicates that no linkage information is available
2555 * for a provided CXCursor. */
2556 CXLinkage_Invalid,
2557 /**
2558 * \brief This is the linkage for variables, parameters, and so on that
2559 * have automatic storage. This covers normal (non-extern) local variables.
2560 */
2561 CXLinkage_NoLinkage,
2562 /** \brief This is the linkage for static variables and static functions. */
2563 CXLinkage_Internal,
2564 /** \brief This is the linkage for entities with external linkage that live
2565 * in C++ anonymous namespaces.*/
2566 CXLinkage_UniqueExternal,
2567 /** \brief This is the linkage for entities with true, external linkage. */
2568 CXLinkage_External
2569};
2570
2571/**
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002572 * \brief Determine the linkage of the entity referred to by a given cursor.
Ted Kremenekfb4961d2010-03-03 06:36:57 +00002573 */
2574CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXLinkageKind clang_getCursorLinkage(CXCursor cursor);
2575
Ehsan Akhgarib743de72016-05-31 15:55:51 +00002576enum CXVisibilityKind {
2577 /** \brief This value indicates that no visibility information is available
2578 * for a provided CXCursor. */
2579 CXVisibility_Invalid,
2580
2581 /** \brief Symbol not seen by the linker. */
2582 CXVisibility_Hidden,
2583 /** \brief Symbol seen by the linker but resolves to a symbol inside this object. */
2584 CXVisibility_Protected,
2585 /** \brief Symbol seen by the linker and acts like a normal symbol. */
2586 CXVisibility_Default
2587};
2588
2589/**
2590 * \brief Describe the visibility of the entity referred to by a cursor.
2591 *
2592 * This returns the default visibility if not explicitly specified by
2593 * a visibility attribute. The default visibility may be changed by
2594 * commandline arguments.
2595 *
2596 * \param cursor The cursor to query.
2597 *
2598 * \returns The visibility of the cursor.
2599 */
2600CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXVisibilityKind clang_getCursorVisibility(CXCursor cursor);
2601
Ehsan Akhgari93697fa2015-11-23 19:56:46 +00002602/**
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +00002603 * \brief Determine the availability of the entity that this cursor refers to,
2604 * taking the current target platform into account.
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +00002605 *
2606 * \param cursor The cursor to query.
2607 *
2608 * \returns The availability of the cursor.
2609 */
2610CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXAvailabilityKind
2611clang_getCursorAvailability(CXCursor cursor);
2612
2613/**
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +00002614 * Describes the availability of a given entity on a particular platform, e.g.,
2615 * a particular class might only be available on Mac OS 10.7 or newer.
2616 */
2617typedef struct CXPlatformAvailability {
2618 /**
2619 * \brief A string that describes the platform for which this structure
2620 * provides availability information.
2621 *
Manman Renccf25bb2016-06-28 20:55:30 +00002622 * Possible values are "ios" or "macos".
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +00002623 */
2624 CXString Platform;
2625 /**
2626 * \brief The version number in which this entity was introduced.
2627 */
2628 CXVersion Introduced;
2629 /**
2630 * \brief The version number in which this entity was deprecated (but is
2631 * still available).
2632 */
2633 CXVersion Deprecated;
2634 /**
2635 * \brief The version number in which this entity was obsoleted, and therefore
2636 * is no longer available.
2637 */
2638 CXVersion Obsoleted;
2639 /**
2640 * \brief Whether the entity is unconditionally unavailable on this platform.
2641 */
2642 int Unavailable;
2643 /**
2644 * \brief An optional message to provide to a user of this API, e.g., to
2645 * suggest replacement APIs.
2646 */
2647 CXString Message;
2648} CXPlatformAvailability;
2649
2650/**
2651 * \brief Determine the availability of the entity that this cursor refers to
2652 * on any platforms for which availability information is known.
2653 *
2654 * \param cursor The cursor to query.
2655 *
2656 * \param always_deprecated If non-NULL, will be set to indicate whether the
2657 * entity is deprecated on all platforms.
2658 *
2659 * \param deprecated_message If non-NULL, will be set to the message text
2660 * provided along with the unconditional deprecation of this entity. The client
2661 * is responsible for deallocating this string.
2662 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002663 * \param always_unavailable If non-NULL, will be set to indicate whether the
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +00002664 * entity is unavailable on all platforms.
2665 *
2666 * \param unavailable_message If non-NULL, will be set to the message text
2667 * provided along with the unconditional unavailability of this entity. The
2668 * client is responsible for deallocating this string.
2669 *
2670 * \param availability If non-NULL, an array of CXPlatformAvailability instances
2671 * that will be populated with platform availability information, up to either
2672 * the number of platforms for which availability information is available (as
2673 * returned by this function) or \c availability_size, whichever is smaller.
2674 *
2675 * \param availability_size The number of elements available in the
2676 * \c availability array.
2677 *
2678 * \returns The number of platforms (N) for which availability information is
2679 * available (which is unrelated to \c availability_size).
2680 *
2681 * Note that the client is responsible for calling
2682 * \c clang_disposeCXPlatformAvailability to free each of the
2683 * platform-availability structures returned. There are
2684 * \c min(N, availability_size) such structures.
2685 */
2686CINDEX_LINKAGE int
2687clang_getCursorPlatformAvailability(CXCursor cursor,
2688 int *always_deprecated,
2689 CXString *deprecated_message,
2690 int *always_unavailable,
2691 CXString *unavailable_message,
2692 CXPlatformAvailability *availability,
2693 int availability_size);
2694
2695/**
2696 * \brief Free the memory associated with a \c CXPlatformAvailability structure.
2697 */
2698CINDEX_LINKAGE void
2699clang_disposeCXPlatformAvailability(CXPlatformAvailability *availability);
2700
2701/**
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002702 * \brief Describe the "language" of the entity referred to by a cursor.
2703 */
Reid Kleckner9e3bc722013-12-30 17:48:49 +00002704enum CXLanguageKind {
Ted Kremenekee457512010-04-14 20:58:32 +00002705 CXLanguage_Invalid = 0,
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002706 CXLanguage_C,
2707 CXLanguage_ObjC,
Ted Kremenekee457512010-04-14 20:58:32 +00002708 CXLanguage_CPlusPlus
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002709};
2710
2711/**
2712 * \brief Determine the "language" of the entity referred to by a given cursor.
2713 */
2714CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXLanguageKind clang_getCursorLanguage(CXCursor cursor);
2715
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd6e9fa52011-09-27 00:30:30 +00002716/**
2717 * \brief Returns the translation unit that a cursor originated from.
2718 */
2719CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_Cursor_getTranslationUnit(CXCursor);
2720
Ted Kremenekc0b98662013-04-24 07:17:12 +00002721/**
2722 * \brief A fast container representing a set of CXCursors.
2723 */
2724typedef struct CXCursorSetImpl *CXCursorSet;
2725
2726/**
2727 * \brief Creates an empty CXCursorSet.
2728 */
2729CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursorSet clang_createCXCursorSet(void);
2730
2731/**
2732 * \brief Disposes a CXCursorSet and releases its associated memory.
2733 */
2734CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeCXCursorSet(CXCursorSet cset);
2735
2736/**
2737 * \brief Queries a CXCursorSet to see if it contains a specific CXCursor.
2738 *
2739 * \returns non-zero if the set contains the specified cursor.
2740*/
2741CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXCursorSet_contains(CXCursorSet cset,
2742 CXCursor cursor);
2743
2744/**
2745 * \brief Inserts a CXCursor into a CXCursorSet.
2746 *
2747 * \returns zero if the CXCursor was already in the set, and non-zero otherwise.
2748*/
2749CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXCursorSet_insert(CXCursorSet cset,
2750 CXCursor cursor);
2751
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002752/**
2753 * \brief Determine the semantic parent of the given cursor.
2754 *
2755 * The semantic parent of a cursor is the cursor that semantically contains
2756 * the given \p cursor. For many declarations, the lexical and semantic parents
2757 * are equivalent (the lexical parent is returned by
2758 * \c clang_getCursorLexicalParent()). They diverge when declarations or
2759 * definitions are provided out-of-line. For example:
2760 *
2761 * \code
2762 * class C {
2763 * void f();
2764 * };
2765 *
2766 * void C::f() { }
2767 * \endcode
2768 *
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002769 * In the out-of-line definition of \c C::f, the semantic parent is
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002770 * the class \c C, of which this function is a member. The lexical parent is
2771 * the place where the declaration actually occurs in the source code; in this
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002772 * case, the definition occurs in the translation unit. In general, the
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002773 * lexical parent for a given entity can change without affecting the semantics
2774 * of the program, and the lexical parent of different declarations of the
2775 * same entity may be different. Changing the semantic parent of a declaration,
2776 * on the other hand, can have a major impact on semantics, and redeclarations
2777 * of a particular entity should all have the same semantic context.
2778 *
2779 * In the example above, both declarations of \c C::f have \c C as their
2780 * semantic context, while the lexical context of the first \c C::f is \c C
2781 * and the lexical context of the second \c C::f is the translation unit.
Douglas Gregor7ecd19e2010-12-21 07:55:45 +00002782 *
2783 * For global declarations, the semantic parent is the translation unit.
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002784 */
2785CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorSemanticParent(CXCursor cursor);
2786
2787/**
2788 * \brief Determine the lexical parent of the given cursor.
2789 *
2790 * The lexical parent of a cursor is the cursor in which the given \p cursor
2791 * was actually written. For many declarations, the lexical and semantic parents
2792 * are equivalent (the semantic parent is returned by
2793 * \c clang_getCursorSemanticParent()). They diverge when declarations or
2794 * definitions are provided out-of-line. For example:
2795 *
2796 * \code
2797 * class C {
2798 * void f();
2799 * };
2800 *
2801 * void C::f() { }
2802 * \endcode
2803 *
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002804 * In the out-of-line definition of \c C::f, the semantic parent is
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002805 * the class \c C, of which this function is a member. The lexical parent is
2806 * the place where the declaration actually occurs in the source code; in this
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002807 * case, the definition occurs in the translation unit. In general, the
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002808 * lexical parent for a given entity can change without affecting the semantics
2809 * of the program, and the lexical parent of different declarations of the
2810 * same entity may be different. Changing the semantic parent of a declaration,
2811 * on the other hand, can have a major impact on semantics, and redeclarations
2812 * of a particular entity should all have the same semantic context.
2813 *
2814 * In the example above, both declarations of \c C::f have \c C as their
2815 * semantic context, while the lexical context of the first \c C::f is \c C
2816 * and the lexical context of the second \c C::f is the translation unit.
Douglas Gregor7ecd19e2010-12-21 07:55:45 +00002817 *
2818 * For declarations written in the global scope, the lexical parent is
2819 * the translation unit.
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002820 */
2821CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorLexicalParent(CXCursor cursor);
Douglas Gregor99a26af2010-10-01 20:25:15 +00002822
2823/**
2824 * \brief Determine the set of methods that are overridden by the given
2825 * method.
2826 *
2827 * In both Objective-C and C++, a method (aka virtual member function,
2828 * in C++) can override a virtual method in a base class. For
2829 * Objective-C, a method is said to override any method in the class's
Argyrios Kyrtzidisbfb24252012-03-08 00:20:03 +00002830 * base class, its protocols, or its categories' protocols, that has the same
2831 * selector and is of the same kind (class or instance).
2832 * If no such method exists, the search continues to the class's superclass,
2833 * its protocols, and its categories, and so on. A method from an Objective-C
2834 * implementation is considered to override the same methods as its
2835 * corresponding method in the interface.
Douglas Gregor99a26af2010-10-01 20:25:15 +00002836 *
2837 * For C++, a virtual member function overrides any virtual member
2838 * function with the same signature that occurs in its base
2839 * classes. With multiple inheritance, a virtual member function can
2840 * override several virtual member functions coming from different
2841 * base classes.
2842 *
2843 * In all cases, this function determines the immediate overridden
2844 * method, rather than all of the overridden methods. For example, if
2845 * a method is originally declared in a class A, then overridden in B
2846 * (which in inherits from A) and also in C (which inherited from B),
2847 * then the only overridden method returned from this function when
2848 * invoked on C's method will be B's method. The client may then
2849 * invoke this function again, given the previously-found overridden
2850 * methods, to map out the complete method-override set.
2851 *
2852 * \param cursor A cursor representing an Objective-C or C++
2853 * method. This routine will compute the set of methods that this
2854 * method overrides.
2855 *
2856 * \param overridden A pointer whose pointee will be replaced with a
2857 * pointer to an array of cursors, representing the set of overridden
2858 * methods. If there are no overridden methods, the pointee will be
2859 * set to NULL. The pointee must be freed via a call to
2860 * \c clang_disposeOverriddenCursors().
2861 *
2862 * \param num_overridden A pointer to the number of overridden
2863 * functions, will be set to the number of overridden functions in the
2864 * array pointed to by \p overridden.
2865 */
2866CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getOverriddenCursors(CXCursor cursor,
2867 CXCursor **overridden,
2868 unsigned *num_overridden);
2869
2870/**
2871 * \brief Free the set of overridden cursors returned by \c
2872 * clang_getOverriddenCursors().
2873 */
2874CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeOverriddenCursors(CXCursor *overridden);
2875
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002876/**
Douglas Gregor796d76a2010-10-20 22:00:55 +00002877 * \brief Retrieve the file that is included by the given inclusion directive
2878 * cursor.
2879 */
2880CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_getIncludedFile(CXCursor cursor);
2881
2882/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002883 * @}
2884 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002885
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002886/**
2887 * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_SOURCE Mapping between cursors and source code
2888 *
2889 * Cursors represent a location within the Abstract Syntax Tree (AST). These
2890 * routines help map between cursors and the physical locations where the
2891 * described entities occur in the source code. The mapping is provided in
2892 * both directions, so one can map from source code to the AST and back.
2893 *
2894 * @{
Steve Naroffa1c72842009-08-28 15:28:48 +00002895 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002896
Steve Naroff20bad0b2009-10-21 13:56:23 +00002897/**
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +00002898 * \brief Map a source location to the cursor that describes the entity at that
2899 * location in the source code.
2900 *
2901 * clang_getCursor() maps an arbitrary source location within a translation
2902 * unit down to the most specific cursor that describes the entity at that
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002903 * location. For example, given an expression \c x + y, invoking
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +00002904 * clang_getCursor() with a source location pointing to "x" will return the
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002905 * cursor for "x"; similarly for "y". If the cursor points anywhere between
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +00002906 * "x" or "y" (e.g., on the + or the whitespace around it), clang_getCursor()
2907 * will return a cursor referring to the "+" expression.
2908 *
2909 * \returns a cursor representing the entity at the given source location, or
2910 * a NULL cursor if no such entity can be found.
Steve Naroff20bad0b2009-10-21 13:56:23 +00002911 */
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +00002912CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursor(CXTranslationUnit, CXSourceLocation);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002913
Douglas Gregor66a58812010-01-18 22:46:11 +00002914/**
2915 * \brief Retrieve the physical location of the source constructor referenced
2916 * by the given cursor.
2917 *
2918 * The location of a declaration is typically the location of the name of that
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002919 * declaration, where the name of that declaration would occur if it is
2920 * unnamed, or some keyword that introduces that particular declaration.
2921 * The location of a reference is where that reference occurs within the
Douglas Gregor66a58812010-01-18 22:46:11 +00002922 * source code.
2923 */
2924CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getCursorLocation(CXCursor);
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002925
Douglas Gregor6b8232f2010-01-19 19:34:47 +00002926/**
2927 * \brief Retrieve the physical extent of the source construct referenced by
Douglas Gregor33c34ac2010-01-19 00:34:46 +00002928 * the given cursor.
2929 *
2930 * The extent of a cursor starts with the file/line/column pointing at the
2931 * first character within the source construct that the cursor refers to and
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002932 * ends with the last character within that source construct. For a
Douglas Gregor33c34ac2010-01-19 00:34:46 +00002933 * declaration, the extent covers the declaration itself. For a reference,
2934 * the extent covers the location of the reference (e.g., where the referenced
2935 * entity was actually used).
2936 */
2937CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getCursorExtent(CXCursor);
Douglas Gregorad27e8b2010-01-19 01:20:04 +00002938
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002939/**
2940 * @}
2941 */
Ted Kremeneka5940822010-08-26 01:42:22 +00002942
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002943/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00002944 * \defgroup CINDEX_TYPES Type information for CXCursors
2945 *
2946 * @{
2947 */
2948
2949/**
2950 * \brief Describes the kind of type
2951 */
2952enum CXTypeKind {
2953 /**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002954 * \brief Represents an invalid type (e.g., where no type is available).
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00002955 */
2956 CXType_Invalid = 0,
2957
2958 /**
2959 * \brief A type whose specific kind is not exposed via this
2960 * interface.
2961 */
2962 CXType_Unexposed = 1,
2963
2964 /* Builtin types */
2965 CXType_Void = 2,
2966 CXType_Bool = 3,
2967 CXType_Char_U = 4,
2968 CXType_UChar = 5,
2969 CXType_Char16 = 6,
2970 CXType_Char32 = 7,
2971 CXType_UShort = 8,
2972 CXType_UInt = 9,
2973 CXType_ULong = 10,
2974 CXType_ULongLong = 11,
2975 CXType_UInt128 = 12,
2976 CXType_Char_S = 13,
2977 CXType_SChar = 14,
2978 CXType_WChar = 15,
2979 CXType_Short = 16,
2980 CXType_Int = 17,
2981 CXType_Long = 18,
2982 CXType_LongLong = 19,
2983 CXType_Int128 = 20,
2984 CXType_Float = 21,
2985 CXType_Double = 22,
2986 CXType_LongDouble = 23,
2987 CXType_NullPtr = 24,
2988 CXType_Overload = 25,
2989 CXType_Dependent = 26,
2990 CXType_ObjCId = 27,
2991 CXType_ObjCClass = 28,
2992 CXType_ObjCSel = 29,
Nemanja Ivanovicbb1ea2d2016-05-09 08:52:33 +00002993 CXType_Float128 = 30,
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00002994 CXType_FirstBuiltin = CXType_Void,
2995 CXType_LastBuiltin = CXType_ObjCSel,
2996
2997 CXType_Complex = 100,
2998 CXType_Pointer = 101,
2999 CXType_BlockPointer = 102,
3000 CXType_LValueReference = 103,
3001 CXType_RValueReference = 104,
3002 CXType_Record = 105,
3003 CXType_Enum = 106,
3004 CXType_Typedef = 107,
3005 CXType_ObjCInterface = 108,
Ted Kremenekc1508872010-06-21 20:15:39 +00003006 CXType_ObjCObjectPointer = 109,
3007 CXType_FunctionNoProto = 110,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b0cf602011-09-27 17:44:34 +00003008 CXType_FunctionProto = 111,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003009 CXType_ConstantArray = 112,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0661a712013-07-23 17:36:21 +00003010 CXType_Vector = 113,
3011 CXType_IncompleteArray = 114,
3012 CXType_VariableArray = 115,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7a4253b2013-10-03 16:19:23 +00003013 CXType_DependentSizedArray = 116,
Sergey Kalinichevc0151202015-11-15 13:10:10 +00003014 CXType_MemberPointer = 117,
Sergey Kalinichev69770ae2016-05-03 06:58:29 +00003015 CXType_Auto = 118,
3016
3017 /**
3018 * \brief Represents a type that was referred to using an elaborated type keyword.
3019 *
3020 * E.g., struct S, or via a qualified name, e.g., N::M::type, or both.
3021 */
3022 CXType_Elaborated = 119
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003023};
3024
3025/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003026 * \brief Describes the calling convention of a function type
3027 */
3028enum CXCallingConv {
3029 CXCallingConv_Default = 0,
3030 CXCallingConv_C = 1,
3031 CXCallingConv_X86StdCall = 2,
3032 CXCallingConv_X86FastCall = 3,
3033 CXCallingConv_X86ThisCall = 4,
3034 CXCallingConv_X86Pascal = 5,
3035 CXCallingConv_AAPCS = 6,
3036 CXCallingConv_AAPCS_VFP = 7,
Erich Keane757d3172016-11-02 18:29:35 +00003037 CXCallingConv_X86RegCall = 8,
Guy Benyeif0a014b2012-12-25 08:53:55 +00003038 CXCallingConv_IntelOclBicc = 9,
Charles Davisb5a214e2013-08-30 04:39:01 +00003039 CXCallingConv_X86_64Win64 = 10,
3040 CXCallingConv_X86_64SysV = 11,
Reid Klecknerd7857f02014-10-24 17:42:17 +00003041 CXCallingConv_X86VectorCall = 12,
John McCall477f2bb2016-03-03 06:39:32 +00003042 CXCallingConv_Swift = 13,
Roman Levenstein35aa5ce2016-03-16 18:00:46 +00003043 CXCallingConv_PreserveMost = 14,
3044 CXCallingConv_PreserveAll = 15,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003045
3046 CXCallingConv_Invalid = 100,
3047 CXCallingConv_Unexposed = 200
3048};
3049
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003050/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003051 * \brief The type of an element in the abstract syntax tree.
3052 *
3053 */
3054typedef struct {
3055 enum CXTypeKind kind;
3056 void *data[2];
3057} CXType;
3058
3059/**
3060 * \brief Retrieve the type of a CXCursor (if any).
3061 */
3062CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCursorType(CXCursor C);
3063
3064/**
Dmitri Gribenko00353722013-02-15 21:15:49 +00003065 * \brief Pretty-print the underlying type using the rules of the
3066 * language of the translation unit from which it came.
3067 *
3068 * If the type is invalid, an empty string is returned.
3069 */
3070CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTypeSpelling(CXType CT);
3071
3072/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003073 * \brief Retrieve the underlying type of a typedef declaration.
3074 *
3075 * If the cursor does not reference a typedef declaration, an invalid type is
3076 * returned.
3077 */
3078CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getTypedefDeclUnderlyingType(CXCursor C);
3079
3080/**
3081 * \brief Retrieve the integer type of an enum declaration.
3082 *
3083 * If the cursor does not reference an enum declaration, an invalid type is
3084 * returned.
3085 */
3086CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getEnumDeclIntegerType(CXCursor C);
3087
3088/**
3089 * \brief Retrieve the integer value of an enum constant declaration as a signed
3090 * long long.
3091 *
3092 * If the cursor does not reference an enum constant declaration, LLONG_MIN is returned.
3093 * Since this is also potentially a valid constant value, the kind of the cursor
3094 * must be verified before calling this function.
3095 */
3096CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getEnumConstantDeclValue(CXCursor C);
3097
3098/**
3099 * \brief Retrieve the integer value of an enum constant declaration as an unsigned
3100 * long long.
3101 *
3102 * If the cursor does not reference an enum constant declaration, ULLONG_MAX is returned.
3103 * Since this is also potentially a valid constant value, the kind of the cursor
3104 * must be verified before calling this function.
3105 */
3106CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned long long clang_getEnumConstantDeclUnsignedValue(CXCursor C);
3107
3108/**
Dmitri Gribenkob506ba12012-12-04 15:13:46 +00003109 * \brief Retrieve the bit width of a bit field declaration as an integer.
3110 *
3111 * If a cursor that is not a bit field declaration is passed in, -1 is returned.
3112 */
3113CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getFieldDeclBitWidth(CXCursor C);
3114
3115/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00003116 * \brief Retrieve the number of non-variadic arguments associated with a given
3117 * cursor.
3118 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb2792972013-04-01 17:38:59 +00003119 * The number of arguments can be determined for calls as well as for
3120 * declarations of functions or methods. For other cursors -1 is returned.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00003121 */
3122CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getNumArguments(CXCursor C);
3123
3124/**
3125 * \brief Retrieve the argument cursor of a function or method.
3126 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb2792972013-04-01 17:38:59 +00003127 * The argument cursor can be determined for calls as well as for declarations
3128 * of functions or methods. For other cursors and for invalid indices, an
3129 * invalid cursor is returned.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00003130 */
3131CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_Cursor_getArgument(CXCursor C, unsigned i);
3132
3133/**
Eli Benderskyc27a0c42014-10-10 20:01:05 +00003134 * \brief Describes the kind of a template argument.
3135 *
3136 * See the definition of llvm::clang::TemplateArgument::ArgKind for full
3137 * element descriptions.
3138 */
3139enum CXTemplateArgumentKind {
3140 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Null,
3141 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Type,
3142 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Declaration,
3143 CXTemplateArgumentKind_NullPtr,
3144 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Integral,
3145 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Template,
3146 CXTemplateArgumentKind_TemplateExpansion,
3147 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Expression,
3148 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Pack,
3149 /* Indicates an error case, preventing the kind from being deduced. */
3150 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Invalid
3151};
3152
3153/**
3154 *\brief Returns the number of template args of a function decl representing a
3155 * template specialization.
3156 *
3157 * If the argument cursor cannot be converted into a template function
3158 * declaration, -1 is returned.
3159 *
3160 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3161 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3162 * void foo() { ... }
3163 *
3164 * template <>
3165 * void foo<float, -7, true>();
3166 *
3167 * The value 3 would be returned from this call.
3168 */
3169CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getNumTemplateArguments(CXCursor C);
3170
3171/**
3172 * \brief Retrieve the kind of the I'th template argument of the CXCursor C.
3173 *
3174 * If the argument CXCursor does not represent a FunctionDecl, an invalid
3175 * template argument kind is returned.
3176 *
3177 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3178 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3179 * void foo() { ... }
3180 *
3181 * template <>
3182 * void foo<float, -7, true>();
3183 *
3184 * For I = 0, 1, and 2, Type, Integral, and Integral will be returned,
3185 * respectively.
3186 */
3187CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXTemplateArgumentKind clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentKind(
3188 CXCursor C, unsigned I);
3189
3190/**
3191 * \brief Retrieve a CXType representing the type of a TemplateArgument of a
3192 * function decl representing a template specialization.
3193 *
3194 * If the argument CXCursor does not represent a FunctionDecl whose I'th
3195 * template argument has a kind of CXTemplateArgKind_Integral, an invalid type
3196 * is returned.
3197 *
3198 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3199 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3200 * void foo() { ... }
3201 *
3202 * template <>
3203 * void foo<float, -7, true>();
3204 *
3205 * If called with I = 0, "float", will be returned.
3206 * Invalid types will be returned for I == 1 or 2.
3207 */
3208CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentType(CXCursor C,
3209 unsigned I);
3210
3211/**
3212 * \brief Retrieve the value of an Integral TemplateArgument (of a function
3213 * decl representing a template specialization) as a signed long long.
3214 *
3215 * It is undefined to call this function on a CXCursor that does not represent a
3216 * FunctionDecl or whose I'th template argument is not an integral value.
3217 *
3218 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3219 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3220 * void foo() { ... }
3221 *
3222 * template <>
3223 * void foo<float, -7, true>();
3224 *
3225 * If called with I = 1 or 2, -7 or true will be returned, respectively.
3226 * For I == 0, this function's behavior is undefined.
3227 */
3228CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentValue(CXCursor C,
3229 unsigned I);
3230
3231/**
3232 * \brief Retrieve the value of an Integral TemplateArgument (of a function
3233 * decl representing a template specialization) as an unsigned long long.
3234 *
3235 * It is undefined to call this function on a CXCursor that does not represent a
3236 * FunctionDecl or whose I'th template argument is not an integral value.
3237 *
3238 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3239 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3240 * void foo() { ... }
3241 *
3242 * template <>
3243 * void foo<float, 2147483649, true>();
3244 *
3245 * If called with I = 1 or 2, 2147483649 or true will be returned, respectively.
3246 * For I == 0, this function's behavior is undefined.
3247 */
3248CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned long long clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentUnsignedValue(
3249 CXCursor C, unsigned I);
3250
3251/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003252 * \brief Determine whether two CXTypes represent the same type.
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003253 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003254 * \returns non-zero if the CXTypes represent the same type and
3255 * zero otherwise.
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003256 */
3257CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalTypes(CXType A, CXType B);
3258
3259/**
3260 * \brief Return the canonical type for a CXType.
3261 *
3262 * Clang's type system explicitly models typedefs and all the ways
3263 * a specific type can be represented. The canonical type is the underlying
3264 * type with all the "sugar" removed. For example, if 'T' is a typedef
3265 * for 'int', the canonical type for 'T' would be 'int'.
3266 */
3267CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCanonicalType(CXType T);
3268
3269/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003270 * \brief Determine whether a CXType has the "const" qualifier set,
3271 * without looking through typedefs that may have added "const" at a
3272 * different level.
Douglas Gregor56a63802011-01-27 16:27:11 +00003273 */
3274CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isConstQualifiedType(CXType T);
3275
3276/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00003277 * \brief Determine whether a CXCursor that is a macro, is
3278 * function like.
3279 */
3280CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isMacroFunctionLike(CXCursor C);
3281
3282/**
3283 * \brief Determine whether a CXCursor that is a macro, is a
3284 * builtin one.
3285 */
3286CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isMacroBuiltin(CXCursor C);
3287
3288/**
3289 * \brief Determine whether a CXCursor that is a function declaration, is an
3290 * inline declaration.
3291 */
3292CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isFunctionInlined(CXCursor C);
3293
3294/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003295 * \brief Determine whether a CXType has the "volatile" qualifier set,
3296 * without looking through typedefs that may have added "volatile" at
3297 * a different level.
Douglas Gregor56a63802011-01-27 16:27:11 +00003298 */
3299CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isVolatileQualifiedType(CXType T);
3300
3301/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003302 * \brief Determine whether a CXType has the "restrict" qualifier set,
3303 * without looking through typedefs that may have added "restrict" at a
3304 * different level.
Douglas Gregor56a63802011-01-27 16:27:11 +00003305 */
3306CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isRestrictQualifiedType(CXType T);
3307
3308/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003309 * \brief For pointer types, returns the type of the pointee.
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003310 */
3311CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getPointeeType(CXType T);
3312
3313/**
3314 * \brief Return the cursor for the declaration of the given type.
3315 */
3316CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getTypeDeclaration(CXType T);
3317
David Chisnall50e4eba2010-12-30 14:05:53 +00003318/**
3319 * Returns the Objective-C type encoding for the specified declaration.
3320 */
3321CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDeclObjCTypeEncoding(CXCursor C);
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003322
3323/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00003324 * Returns the Objective-C type encoding for the specified CXType.
3325 */
3326CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Type_getObjCEncoding(CXType type);
3327
3328/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003329 * \brief Retrieve the spelling of a given CXTypeKind.
3330 */
3331CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTypeKindSpelling(enum CXTypeKind K);
3332
3333/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003334 * \brief Retrieve the calling convention associated with a function type.
3335 *
3336 * If a non-function type is passed in, CXCallingConv_Invalid is returned.
3337 */
3338CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCallingConv clang_getFunctionTypeCallingConv(CXType T);
3339
3340/**
Alp Toker314cc812014-01-25 16:55:45 +00003341 * \brief Retrieve the return type associated with a function type.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003342 *
3343 * If a non-function type is passed in, an invalid type is returned.
Ted Kremenekc1508872010-06-21 20:15:39 +00003344 */
3345CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getResultType(CXType T);
3346
3347/**
Alp Toker601b22c2014-01-21 23:35:24 +00003348 * \brief Retrieve the number of non-variadic parameters associated with a
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003349 * function type.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003350 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00003351 * If a non-function type is passed in, -1 is returned.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003352 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00003353CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getNumArgTypes(CXType T);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003354
3355/**
Alp Toker601b22c2014-01-21 23:35:24 +00003356 * \brief Retrieve the type of a parameter of a function type.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003357 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003358 * If a non-function type is passed in or the function does not have enough
3359 * parameters, an invalid type is returned.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003360 */
3361CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getArgType(CXType T, unsigned i);
3362
3363/**
3364 * \brief Return 1 if the CXType is a variadic function type, and 0 otherwise.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003365 */
3366CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isFunctionTypeVariadic(CXType T);
3367
3368/**
Alp Toker314cc812014-01-25 16:55:45 +00003369 * \brief Retrieve the return type associated with a given cursor.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003370 *
3371 * This only returns a valid type if the cursor refers to a function or method.
Ted Kremenekc62ab8d2010-06-21 20:48:56 +00003372 */
3373CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCursorResultType(CXCursor C);
3374
3375/**
Ted Kremenek0c7476a2010-07-30 00:14:11 +00003376 * \brief Return 1 if the CXType is a POD (plain old data) type, and 0
3377 * otherwise.
3378 */
3379CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isPODType(CXType T);
3380
3381/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003382 * \brief Return the element type of an array, complex, or vector type.
3383 *
3384 * If a type is passed in that is not an array, complex, or vector type,
3385 * an invalid type is returned.
3386 */
3387CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getElementType(CXType T);
3388
3389/**
3390 * \brief Return the number of elements of an array or vector type.
3391 *
3392 * If a type is passed in that is not an array or vector type,
3393 * -1 is returned.
3394 */
3395CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getNumElements(CXType T);
3396
3397/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b0cf602011-09-27 17:44:34 +00003398 * \brief Return the element type of an array type.
3399 *
3400 * If a non-array type is passed in, an invalid type is returned.
3401 */
3402CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getArrayElementType(CXType T);
3403
3404/**
Sylvestre Ledru830885c2012-07-23 08:59:39 +00003405 * \brief Return the array size of a constant array.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b0cf602011-09-27 17:44:34 +00003406 *
3407 * If a non-array type is passed in, -1 is returned.
3408 */
3409CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getArraySize(CXType T);
3410
3411/**
Sergey Kalinichev69770ae2016-05-03 06:58:29 +00003412 * \brief Retrieve the type named by the qualified-id.
3413 *
3414 * If a non-elaborated type is passed in, an invalid type is returned.
3415 */
3416CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getNamedType(CXType T);
3417
3418/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidise822f582013-04-11 01:20:11 +00003419 * \brief List the possible error codes for \c clang_Type_getSizeOf,
3420 * \c clang_Type_getAlignOf, \c clang_Type_getOffsetOf and
3421 * \c clang_Cursor_getOffsetOf.
3422 *
3423 * A value of this enumeration type can be returned if the target type is not
3424 * a valid argument to sizeof, alignof or offsetof.
3425 */
3426enum CXTypeLayoutError {
3427 /**
3428 * \brief Type is of kind CXType_Invalid.
3429 */
3430 CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid = -1,
3431 /**
3432 * \brief The type is an incomplete Type.
3433 */
3434 CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete = -2,
3435 /**
3436 * \brief The type is a dependent Type.
3437 */
3438 CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent = -3,
3439 /**
3440 * \brief The type is not a constant size type.
3441 */
3442 CXTypeLayoutError_NotConstantSize = -4,
3443 /**
3444 * \brief The Field name is not valid for this record.
3445 */
3446 CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName = -5
3447};
3448
3449/**
3450 * \brief Return the alignment of a type in bytes as per C++[expr.alignof]
3451 * standard.
3452 *
3453 * If the type declaration is invalid, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned.
3454 * If the type declaration is an incomplete type, CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete
3455 * is returned.
3456 * If the type declaration is a dependent type, CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is
3457 * returned.
3458 * If the type declaration is not a constant size type,
3459 * CXTypeLayoutError_NotConstantSize is returned.
3460 */
3461CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getAlignOf(CXType T);
3462
3463/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7a4253b2013-10-03 16:19:23 +00003464 * \brief Return the class type of an member pointer type.
3465 *
3466 * If a non-member-pointer type is passed in, an invalid type is returned.
3467 */
3468CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getClassType(CXType T);
3469
3470/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidise822f582013-04-11 01:20:11 +00003471 * \brief Return the size of a type in bytes as per C++[expr.sizeof] standard.
3472 *
3473 * If the type declaration is invalid, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned.
3474 * If the type declaration is an incomplete type, CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete
3475 * is returned.
3476 * If the type declaration is a dependent type, CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is
3477 * returned.
3478 */
3479CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getSizeOf(CXType T);
3480
3481/**
3482 * \brief Return the offset of a field named S in a record of type T in bits
3483 * as it would be returned by __offsetof__ as per C++11[18.2p4]
3484 *
3485 * If the cursor is not a record field declaration, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid
3486 * is returned.
3487 * If the field's type declaration is an incomplete type,
3488 * CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete is returned.
3489 * If the field's type declaration is a dependent type,
3490 * CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is returned.
3491 * If the field's name S is not found,
3492 * CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName is returned.
3493 */
3494CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getOffsetOf(CXType T, const char *S);
3495
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2bff5162015-04-13 16:55:04 +00003496/**
3497 * \brief Return the offset of the field represented by the Cursor.
3498 *
3499 * If the cursor is not a field declaration, -1 is returned.
3500 * If the cursor semantic parent is not a record field declaration,
3501 * CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned.
3502 * If the field's type declaration is an incomplete type,
3503 * CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete is returned.
3504 * If the field's type declaration is a dependent type,
3505 * CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is returned.
3506 * If the field's name S is not found,
3507 * CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName is returned.
3508 */
3509CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Cursor_getOffsetOfField(CXCursor C);
3510
3511/**
3512 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor represents an anonymous record
3513 * declaration.
3514 */
3515CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isAnonymous(CXCursor C);
3516
Argyrios Kyrtzidisadff3ae2013-10-11 19:58:38 +00003517enum CXRefQualifierKind {
3518 /** \brief No ref-qualifier was provided. */
3519 CXRefQualifier_None = 0,
3520 /** \brief An lvalue ref-qualifier was provided (\c &). */
3521 CXRefQualifier_LValue,
3522 /** \brief An rvalue ref-qualifier was provided (\c &&). */
3523 CXRefQualifier_RValue
3524};
3525
3526/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis35f5aab2016-11-15 20:51:46 +00003527 * \brief Returns the number of template arguments for given template
3528 * specialization, or -1 if type \c T is not a template specialization.
Dmitri Gribenko6ede6ab2014-02-27 16:05:05 +00003529 */
3530CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Type_getNumTemplateArguments(CXType T);
3531
3532/**
3533 * \brief Returns the type template argument of a template class specialization
3534 * at given index.
3535 *
3536 * This function only returns template type arguments and does not handle
3537 * template template arguments or variadic packs.
3538 */
3539CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getTemplateArgumentAsType(CXType T, unsigned i);
3540
3541/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisadff3ae2013-10-11 19:58:38 +00003542 * \brief Retrieve the ref-qualifier kind of a function or method.
3543 *
3544 * The ref-qualifier is returned for C++ functions or methods. For other types
3545 * or non-C++ declarations, CXRefQualifier_None is returned.
3546 */
3547CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXRefQualifierKind clang_Type_getCXXRefQualifier(CXType T);
3548
Argyrios Kyrtzidise822f582013-04-11 01:20:11 +00003549/**
3550 * \brief Returns non-zero if the cursor specifies a Record member that is a
3551 * bitfield.
3552 */
3553CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isBitField(CXCursor C);
3554
3555/**
Ted Kremenekae9e2212010-08-27 21:34:58 +00003556 * \brief Returns 1 if the base class specified by the cursor with kind
3557 * CX_CXXBaseSpecifier is virtual.
3558 */
3559CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isVirtualBase(CXCursor);
3560
3561/**
3562 * \brief Represents the C++ access control level to a base class for a
3563 * cursor with kind CX_CXXBaseSpecifier.
3564 */
3565enum CX_CXXAccessSpecifier {
3566 CX_CXXInvalidAccessSpecifier,
3567 CX_CXXPublic,
3568 CX_CXXProtected,
3569 CX_CXXPrivate
3570};
3571
3572/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis1ab09cc2013-04-11 17:02:10 +00003573 * \brief Returns the access control level for the referenced object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisf6464082013-04-11 17:31:13 +00003574 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis1ab09cc2013-04-11 17:02:10 +00003575 * If the cursor refers to a C++ declaration, its access control level within its
3576 * parent scope is returned. Otherwise, if the cursor refers to a base specifier or
3577 * access specifier, the specifier itself is returned.
Ted Kremenekae9e2212010-08-27 21:34:58 +00003578 */
3579CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CX_CXXAccessSpecifier clang_getCXXAccessSpecifier(CXCursor);
3580
3581/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4e0854f2014-10-15 17:05:31 +00003582 * \brief Represents the storage classes as declared in the source. CX_SC_Invalid
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00003583 * was added for the case that the passed cursor in not a declaration.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4e0854f2014-10-15 17:05:31 +00003584 */
3585enum CX_StorageClass {
3586 CX_SC_Invalid,
3587 CX_SC_None,
3588 CX_SC_Extern,
3589 CX_SC_Static,
3590 CX_SC_PrivateExtern,
3591 CX_SC_OpenCLWorkGroupLocal,
3592 CX_SC_Auto,
3593 CX_SC_Register
3594};
3595
3596/**
3597 * \brief Returns the storage class for a function or variable declaration.
3598 *
3599 * If the passed in Cursor is not a function or variable declaration,
3600 * CX_SC_Invalid is returned else the storage class.
3601 */
3602CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CX_StorageClass clang_Cursor_getStorageClass(CXCursor);
3603
3604/**
Douglas Gregor16a2bdd2010-09-13 22:52:57 +00003605 * \brief Determine the number of overloaded declarations referenced by a
3606 * \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor.
3607 *
3608 * \param cursor The cursor whose overloaded declarations are being queried.
3609 *
3610 * \returns The number of overloaded declarations referenced by \c cursor. If it
3611 * is not a \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor, returns 0.
3612 */
3613CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getNumOverloadedDecls(CXCursor cursor);
3614
3615/**
3616 * \brief Retrieve a cursor for one of the overloaded declarations referenced
3617 * by a \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor.
3618 *
3619 * \param cursor The cursor whose overloaded declarations are being queried.
3620 *
3621 * \param index The zero-based index into the set of overloaded declarations in
3622 * the cursor.
3623 *
3624 * \returns A cursor representing the declaration referenced by the given
3625 * \c cursor at the specified \c index. If the cursor does not have an
3626 * associated set of overloaded declarations, or if the index is out of bounds,
3627 * returns \c clang_getNullCursor();
3628 */
3629CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getOverloadedDecl(CXCursor cursor,
3630 unsigned index);
3631
3632/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003633 * @}
3634 */
Ted Kremeneka5940822010-08-26 01:42:22 +00003635
3636/**
Ted Kremenek2c2c5f32010-08-27 21:34:51 +00003637 * \defgroup CINDEX_ATTRIBUTES Information for attributes
Ted Kremeneka5940822010-08-26 01:42:22 +00003638 *
3639 * @{
3640 */
3641
Ted Kremeneka5940822010-08-26 01:42:22 +00003642/**
3643 * \brief For cursors representing an iboutletcollection attribute,
3644 * this function returns the collection element type.
3645 *
3646 */
3647CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getIBOutletCollectionType(CXCursor);
3648
3649/**
3650 * @}
3651 */
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003652
3653/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003654 * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_TRAVERSAL Traversing the AST with cursors
3655 *
3656 * These routines provide the ability to traverse the abstract syntax tree
3657 * using cursors.
3658 *
3659 * @{
3660 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003661
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003662/**
3663 * \brief Describes how the traversal of the children of a particular
3664 * cursor should proceed after visiting a particular child cursor.
3665 *
3666 * A value of this enumeration type should be returned by each
3667 * \c CXCursorVisitor to indicate how clang_visitChildren() proceed.
3668 */
3669enum CXChildVisitResult {
3670 /**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003671 * \brief Terminates the cursor traversal.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003672 */
3673 CXChildVisit_Break,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003674 /**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003675 * \brief Continues the cursor traversal with the next sibling of
3676 * the cursor just visited, without visiting its children.
3677 */
3678 CXChildVisit_Continue,
3679 /**
3680 * \brief Recursively traverse the children of this cursor, using
3681 * the same visitor and client data.
3682 */
3683 CXChildVisit_Recurse
3684};
3685
3686/**
3687 * \brief Visitor invoked for each cursor found by a traversal.
3688 *
3689 * This visitor function will be invoked for each cursor found by
3690 * clang_visitCursorChildren(). Its first argument is the cursor being
3691 * visited, its second argument is the parent visitor for that cursor,
3692 * and its third argument is the client data provided to
3693 * clang_visitCursorChildren().
3694 *
3695 * The visitor should return one of the \c CXChildVisitResult values
3696 * to direct clang_visitCursorChildren().
3697 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003698typedef enum CXChildVisitResult (*CXCursorVisitor)(CXCursor cursor,
3699 CXCursor parent,
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003700 CXClientData client_data);
3701
3702/**
3703 * \brief Visit the children of a particular cursor.
3704 *
3705 * This function visits all the direct children of the given cursor,
3706 * invoking the given \p visitor function with the cursors of each
3707 * visited child. The traversal may be recursive, if the visitor returns
3708 * \c CXChildVisit_Recurse. The traversal may also be ended prematurely, if
3709 * the visitor returns \c CXChildVisit_Break.
3710 *
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003711 * \param parent the cursor whose child may be visited. All kinds of
Daniel Dunbarb9999fd2010-01-24 04:10:31 +00003712 * cursors can be visited, including invalid cursors (which, by
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003713 * definition, have no children).
3714 *
3715 * \param visitor the visitor function that will be invoked for each
3716 * child of \p parent.
3717 *
3718 * \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will
3719 * be passed to the visitor each time it is invoked.
3720 *
3721 * \returns a non-zero value if the traversal was terminated
3722 * prematurely by the visitor returning \c CXChildVisit_Break.
3723 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003724CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_visitChildren(CXCursor parent,
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003725 CXCursorVisitor visitor,
3726 CXClientData client_data);
David Chisnallb2aa0ef2010-11-03 14:12:26 +00003727#ifdef __has_feature
3728# if __has_feature(blocks)
3729/**
3730 * \brief Visitor invoked for each cursor found by a traversal.
3731 *
3732 * This visitor block will be invoked for each cursor found by
3733 * clang_visitChildrenWithBlock(). Its first argument is the cursor being
3734 * visited, its second argument is the parent visitor for that cursor.
3735 *
3736 * The visitor should return one of the \c CXChildVisitResult values
3737 * to direct clang_visitChildrenWithBlock().
3738 */
3739typedef enum CXChildVisitResult
3740 (^CXCursorVisitorBlock)(CXCursor cursor, CXCursor parent);
3741
3742/**
3743 * Visits the children of a cursor using the specified block. Behaves
3744 * identically to clang_visitChildren() in all other respects.
3745 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisa0a35d72016-02-07 18:21:28 +00003746CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_visitChildrenWithBlock(CXCursor parent,
3747 CXCursorVisitorBlock block);
David Chisnallb2aa0ef2010-11-03 14:12:26 +00003748# endif
3749#endif
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003750
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003751/**
3752 * @}
3753 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003754
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003755/**
3756 * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_XREF Cross-referencing in the AST
3757 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003758 * These routines provide the ability to determine references within and
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003759 * across translation units, by providing the names of the entities referenced
3760 * by cursors, follow reference cursors to the declarations they reference,
3761 * and associate declarations with their definitions.
3762 *
3763 * @{
3764 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003765
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003766/**
3767 * \brief Retrieve a Unified Symbol Resolution (USR) for the entity referenced
3768 * by the given cursor.
3769 *
3770 * A Unified Symbol Resolution (USR) is a string that identifies a particular
3771 * entity (function, class, variable, etc.) within a program. USRs can be
3772 * compared across translation units to determine, e.g., when references in
3773 * one translation refer to an entity defined in another translation unit.
3774 */
3775CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorUSR(CXCursor);
3776
3777/**
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00003778 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C class.
3779 */
3780CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCClass(const char *class_name);
3781
3782/**
3783 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C category.
3784 */
3785CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
Ted Kremenekbc1a67b2010-03-15 17:38:58 +00003786 clang_constructUSR_ObjCCategory(const char *class_name,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00003787 const char *category_name);
3788
3789/**
3790 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C protocol.
3791 */
3792CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
3793 clang_constructUSR_ObjCProtocol(const char *protocol_name);
3794
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00003795/**
3796 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C instance variable and
3797 * the USR for its containing class.
3798 */
3799CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCIvar(const char *name,
3800 CXString classUSR);
3801
3802/**
3803 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C method and
3804 * the USR for its containing class.
3805 */
3806CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCMethod(const char *name,
3807 unsigned isInstanceMethod,
3808 CXString classUSR);
3809
3810/**
3811 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C property and the USR
3812 * for its containing class.
3813 */
3814CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCProperty(const char *property,
3815 CXString classUSR);
3816
3817/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003818 * \brief Retrieve a name for the entity referenced by this cursor.
3819 */
3820CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorSpelling(CXCursor);
3821
Douglas Gregor97c75712010-10-02 22:49:11 +00003822/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis191a6a82012-03-30 20:58:35 +00003823 * \brief Retrieve a range for a piece that forms the cursors spelling name.
3824 * Most of the times there is only one range for the complete spelling but for
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003825 * Objective-C methods and Objective-C message expressions, there are multiple
3826 * pieces for each selector identifier.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis191a6a82012-03-30 20:58:35 +00003827 *
3828 * \param pieceIndex the index of the spelling name piece. If this is greater
3829 * than the actual number of pieces, it will return a NULL (invalid) range.
3830 *
3831 * \param options Reserved.
3832 */
3833CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_Cursor_getSpellingNameRange(CXCursor,
3834 unsigned pieceIndex,
3835 unsigned options);
3836
3837/**
Douglas Gregor97c75712010-10-02 22:49:11 +00003838 * \brief Retrieve the display name for the entity referenced by this cursor.
3839 *
3840 * The display name contains extra information that helps identify the cursor,
3841 * such as the parameters of a function or template or the arguments of a
3842 * class template specialization.
3843 */
3844CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorDisplayName(CXCursor);
3845
Douglas Gregorad27e8b2010-01-19 01:20:04 +00003846/** \brief For a cursor that is a reference, retrieve a cursor representing the
3847 * entity that it references.
3848 *
3849 * Reference cursors refer to other entities in the AST. For example, an
3850 * Objective-C superclass reference cursor refers to an Objective-C class.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003851 * This function produces the cursor for the Objective-C class from the
Douglas Gregorad27e8b2010-01-19 01:20:04 +00003852 * cursor for the superclass reference. If the input cursor is a declaration or
3853 * definition, it returns that declaration or definition unchanged.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003854 * Otherwise, returns the NULL cursor.
Douglas Gregorad27e8b2010-01-19 01:20:04 +00003855 */
3856CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorReferenced(CXCursor);
Douglas Gregor6b8232f2010-01-19 19:34:47 +00003857
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003858/**
Douglas Gregor6b8232f2010-01-19 19:34:47 +00003859 * \brief For a cursor that is either a reference to or a declaration
3860 * of some entity, retrieve a cursor that describes the definition of
3861 * that entity.
3862 *
3863 * Some entities can be declared multiple times within a translation
3864 * unit, but only one of those declarations can also be a
3865 * definition. For example, given:
3866 *
3867 * \code
3868 * int f(int, int);
3869 * int g(int x, int y) { return f(x, y); }
3870 * int f(int a, int b) { return a + b; }
3871 * int f(int, int);
3872 * \endcode
3873 *
3874 * there are three declarations of the function "f", but only the
3875 * second one is a definition. The clang_getCursorDefinition()
3876 * function will take any cursor pointing to a declaration of "f"
3877 * (the first or fourth lines of the example) or a cursor referenced
3878 * that uses "f" (the call to "f' inside "g") and will return a
3879 * declaration cursor pointing to the definition (the second "f"
3880 * declaration).
3881 *
3882 * If given a cursor for which there is no corresponding definition,
3883 * e.g., because there is no definition of that entity within this
3884 * translation unit, returns a NULL cursor.
3885 */
3886CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorDefinition(CXCursor);
3887
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003888/**
Douglas Gregor6b8232f2010-01-19 19:34:47 +00003889 * \brief Determine whether the declaration pointed to by this cursor
3890 * is also a definition of that entity.
3891 */
3892CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isCursorDefinition(CXCursor);
3893
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003894/**
Douglas Gregorfec4dc92010-11-19 23:44:15 +00003895 * \brief Retrieve the canonical cursor corresponding to the given cursor.
3896 *
3897 * In the C family of languages, many kinds of entities can be declared several
3898 * times within a single translation unit. For example, a structure type can
3899 * be forward-declared (possibly multiple times) and later defined:
3900 *
3901 * \code
3902 * struct X;
3903 * struct X;
3904 * struct X {
3905 * int member;
3906 * };
3907 * \endcode
3908 *
3909 * The declarations and the definition of \c X are represented by three
3910 * different cursors, all of which are declarations of the same underlying
3911 * entity. One of these cursor is considered the "canonical" cursor, which
3912 * is effectively the representative for the underlying entity. One can
3913 * determine if two cursors are declarations of the same underlying entity by
3914 * comparing their canonical cursors.
3915 *
3916 * \returns The canonical cursor for the entity referred to by the given cursor.
3917 */
3918CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCanonicalCursor(CXCursor);
3919
Argyrios Kyrtzidis210f29f2012-03-30 22:15:48 +00003920/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003921 * \brief If the cursor points to a selector identifier in an Objective-C
3922 * method or message expression, this returns the selector index.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis210f29f2012-03-30 22:15:48 +00003923 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003924 * After getting a cursor with #clang_getCursor, this can be called to
Argyrios Kyrtzidis210f29f2012-03-30 22:15:48 +00003925 * determine if the location points to a selector identifier.
3926 *
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003927 * \returns The selector index if the cursor is an Objective-C method or message
Argyrios Kyrtzidis210f29f2012-03-30 22:15:48 +00003928 * expression and the cursor is pointing to a selector identifier, or -1
3929 * otherwise.
3930 */
3931CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getObjCSelectorIndex(CXCursor);
3932
Douglas Gregorfec4dc92010-11-19 23:44:15 +00003933/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003934 * \brief Given a cursor pointing to a C++ method call or an Objective-C
3935 * message, returns non-zero if the method/message is "dynamic", meaning:
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb6df68212012-07-02 23:54:36 +00003936 *
3937 * For a C++ method: the call is virtual.
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003938 * For an Objective-C message: the receiver is an object instance, not 'super'
3939 * or a specific class.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb6df68212012-07-02 23:54:36 +00003940 *
3941 * If the method/message is "static" or the cursor does not point to a
3942 * method/message, it will return zero.
3943 */
3944CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_isDynamicCall(CXCursor C);
3945
3946/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003947 * \brief Given a cursor pointing to an Objective-C message, returns the CXType
3948 * of the receiver.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb26a24c2012-11-01 02:01:34 +00003949 */
3950CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Cursor_getReceiverType(CXCursor C);
3951
3952/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9adfd8a2013-04-18 22:15:49 +00003953 * \brief Property attributes for a \c CXCursor_ObjCPropertyDecl.
3954 */
3955typedef enum {
3956 CXObjCPropertyAttr_noattr = 0x00,
3957 CXObjCPropertyAttr_readonly = 0x01,
3958 CXObjCPropertyAttr_getter = 0x02,
3959 CXObjCPropertyAttr_assign = 0x04,
3960 CXObjCPropertyAttr_readwrite = 0x08,
3961 CXObjCPropertyAttr_retain = 0x10,
3962 CXObjCPropertyAttr_copy = 0x20,
3963 CXObjCPropertyAttr_nonatomic = 0x40,
3964 CXObjCPropertyAttr_setter = 0x80,
3965 CXObjCPropertyAttr_atomic = 0x100,
3966 CXObjCPropertyAttr_weak = 0x200,
3967 CXObjCPropertyAttr_strong = 0x400,
Manman Ren04fd4d82016-05-31 23:22:04 +00003968 CXObjCPropertyAttr_unsafe_unretained = 0x800,
Manman Ren400e4c32016-06-03 23:11:41 +00003969 CXObjCPropertyAttr_class = 0x1000
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9adfd8a2013-04-18 22:15:49 +00003970} CXObjCPropertyAttrKind;
3971
3972/**
3973 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a property declaration, return the
3974 * associated property attributes. The bits are formed from
3975 * \c CXObjCPropertyAttrKind.
3976 *
3977 * \param reserved Reserved for future use, pass 0.
3978 */
3979CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_getObjCPropertyAttributes(CXCursor C,
3980 unsigned reserved);
3981
3982/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9d9bc012013-04-18 23:29:12 +00003983 * \brief 'Qualifiers' written next to the return and parameter types in
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003984 * Objective-C method declarations.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9d9bc012013-04-18 23:29:12 +00003985 */
3986typedef enum {
3987 CXObjCDeclQualifier_None = 0x0,
3988 CXObjCDeclQualifier_In = 0x1,
3989 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Inout = 0x2,
3990 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Out = 0x4,
3991 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Bycopy = 0x8,
3992 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Byref = 0x10,
3993 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Oneway = 0x20
3994} CXObjCDeclQualifierKind;
3995
3996/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003997 * \brief Given a cursor that represents an Objective-C method or parameter
3998 * declaration, return the associated Objective-C qualifiers for the return
3999 * type or the parameter respectively. The bits are formed from
4000 * CXObjCDeclQualifierKind.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9d9bc012013-04-18 23:29:12 +00004001 */
4002CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_getObjCDeclQualifiers(CXCursor C);
4003
4004/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00004005 * \brief Given a cursor that represents an Objective-C method or property
4006 * declaration, return non-zero if the declaration was affected by "@optional".
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7b50fc52013-07-05 20:44:37 +00004007 * Returns zero if the cursor is not such a declaration or it is "@required".
4008 */
4009CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isObjCOptional(CXCursor C);
4010
4011/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis23814e42013-04-18 23:53:05 +00004012 * \brief Returns non-zero if the given cursor is a variadic function or method.
4013 */
4014CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isVariadic(CXCursor C);
4015
4016/**
Dmitri Gribenkoaab83832012-06-20 00:34:58 +00004017 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a declaration, return the associated
4018 * comment's source range. The range may include multiple consecutive comments
4019 * with whitespace in between.
4020 */
4021CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_Cursor_getCommentRange(CXCursor C);
4022
4023/**
4024 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a declaration, return the associated
4025 * comment text, including comment markers.
4026 */
4027CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getRawCommentText(CXCursor C);
4028
4029/**
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00004030 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a documentable entity (e.g.,
4031 * declaration), return the associated \\brief paragraph; otherwise return the
4032 * first paragraph.
Dmitri Gribenko5188c4b2012-06-26 20:39:18 +00004033 */
4034CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getBriefCommentText(CXCursor C);
4035
4036/**
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00004037 * @}
4038 */
4039
Eli Bendersky44a206f2014-07-31 18:04:56 +00004040/** \defgroup CINDEX_MANGLE Name Mangling API Functions
4041 *
4042 * @{
4043 */
4044
4045/**
4046 * \brief Retrieve the CXString representing the mangled name of the cursor.
4047 */
4048CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getMangling(CXCursor);
4049
4050/**
Saleem Abdulrasool60034432015-11-12 03:57:22 +00004051 * \brief Retrieve the CXStrings representing the mangled symbols of the C++
4052 * constructor or destructor at the cursor.
4053 */
4054CINDEX_LINKAGE CXStringSet *clang_Cursor_getCXXManglings(CXCursor);
4055
4056/**
Eli Bendersky44a206f2014-07-31 18:04:56 +00004057 * @}
4058 */
4059
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00004060/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004061 * \defgroup CINDEX_MODULE Module introspection
4062 *
4063 * The functions in this group provide access to information about modules.
4064 *
4065 * @{
4066 */
4067
4068typedef void *CXModule;
4069
4070/**
4071 * \brief Given a CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl cursor, return the associated module.
4072 */
4073CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_Cursor_getModule(CXCursor C);
4074
4075/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisf6d49c32014-05-14 23:14:37 +00004076 * \brief Given a CXFile header file, return the module that contains it, if one
4077 * exists.
4078 */
4079CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_getModuleForFile(CXTranslationUnit, CXFile);
4080
4081/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004082 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004083 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis12fdb9e2013-04-26 22:47:49 +00004084 * \returns the module file where the provided module object came from.
4085 */
4086CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_Module_getASTFile(CXModule Module);
4087
4088/**
4089 * \param Module a module object.
4090 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004091 * \returns the parent of a sub-module or NULL if the given module is top-level,
4092 * e.g. for 'std.vector' it will return the 'std' module.
4093 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004094CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_Module_getParent(CXModule Module);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004095
4096/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004097 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004098 *
4099 * \returns the name of the module, e.g. for the 'std.vector' sub-module it
4100 * will return "vector".
4101 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004102CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Module_getName(CXModule Module);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004103
4104/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004105 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004106 *
4107 * \returns the full name of the module, e.g. "std.vector".
4108 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004109CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Module_getFullName(CXModule Module);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004110
4111/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004112 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004113 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis884337f2014-05-15 04:44:25 +00004114 * \returns non-zero if the module is a system one.
4115 */
4116CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Module_isSystem(CXModule Module);
4117
4118/**
4119 * \param Module a module object.
4120 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004121 * \returns the number of top level headers associated with this module.
4122 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3c5305c2013-03-13 21:13:43 +00004123CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Module_getNumTopLevelHeaders(CXTranslationUnit,
4124 CXModule Module);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004125
4126/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004127 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004128 *
4129 * \param Index top level header index (zero-based).
4130 *
4131 * \returns the specified top level header associated with the module.
4132 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004133CINDEX_LINKAGE
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3c5305c2013-03-13 21:13:43 +00004134CXFile clang_Module_getTopLevelHeader(CXTranslationUnit,
4135 CXModule Module, unsigned Index);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004136
4137/**
4138 * @}
4139 */
4140
4141/**
Ted Kremenek9cfe9e62010-05-17 20:06:56 +00004142 * \defgroup CINDEX_CPP C++ AST introspection
4143 *
4144 * The routines in this group provide access information in the ASTs specific
4145 * to C++ language features.
4146 *
4147 * @{
4148 */
4149
4150/**
Jonathan Coe29565352016-04-27 12:48:25 +00004151 * \brief Determine if a C++ constructor is a converting constructor.
4152 */
4153CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXConstructor_isConvertingConstructor(CXCursor C);
4154
4155/**
4156 * \brief Determine if a C++ constructor is a copy constructor.
4157 */
4158CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXConstructor_isCopyConstructor(CXCursor C);
4159
4160/**
4161 * \brief Determine if a C++ constructor is the default constructor.
4162 */
4163CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXConstructor_isDefaultConstructor(CXCursor C);
4164
4165/**
4166 * \brief Determine if a C++ constructor is a move constructor.
4167 */
4168CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXConstructor_isMoveConstructor(CXCursor C);
4169
4170/**
Saleem Abdulrasool6ea75db2015-10-27 15:50:22 +00004171 * \brief Determine if a C++ field is declared 'mutable'.
4172 */
4173CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXField_isMutable(CXCursor C);
4174
4175/**
Jonathan Coe29565352016-04-27 12:48:25 +00004176 * \brief Determine if a C++ method is declared '= default'.
4177 */
4178CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isDefaulted(CXCursor C);
4179
4180/**
Dmitri Gribenko62770be2013-05-17 18:38:35 +00004181 * \brief Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
4182 * pure virtual.
4183 */
4184CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isPureVirtual(CXCursor C);
4185
4186/**
Douglas Gregorf11309e2010-08-31 22:12:17 +00004187 * \brief Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
4188 * declared 'static'.
Ted Kremenek9cfe9e62010-05-17 20:06:56 +00004189 */
4190CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isStatic(CXCursor C);
4191
4192/**
Douglas Gregor9519d922011-05-12 15:17:24 +00004193 * \brief Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
4194 * explicitly declared 'virtual' or if it overrides a virtual method from
4195 * one of the base classes.
4196 */
4197CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isVirtual(CXCursor C);
4198
4199/**
Dmitri Gribenkoe570ede2014-04-07 14:59:13 +00004200 * \brief Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
4201 * declared 'const'.
4202 */
4203CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isConst(CXCursor C);
4204
4205/**
Douglas Gregorf11309e2010-08-31 22:12:17 +00004206 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a template, determine
4207 * the cursor kind of the specializations would be generated by instantiating
4208 * the template.
4209 *
4210 * This routine can be used to determine what flavor of function template,
4211 * class template, or class template partial specialization is stored in the
4212 * cursor. For example, it can describe whether a class template cursor is
4213 * declared with "struct", "class" or "union".
4214 *
4215 * \param C The cursor to query. This cursor should represent a template
4216 * declaration.
4217 *
4218 * \returns The cursor kind of the specializations that would be generated
4219 * by instantiating the template \p C. If \p C is not a template, returns
4220 * \c CXCursor_NoDeclFound.
4221 */
4222CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCursorKind clang_getTemplateCursorKind(CXCursor C);
4223
4224/**
Douglas Gregord3f48bd2010-09-02 00:07:54 +00004225 * \brief Given a cursor that may represent a specialization or instantiation
4226 * of a template, retrieve the cursor that represents the template that it
4227 * specializes or from which it was instantiated.
4228 *
4229 * This routine determines the template involved both for explicit
4230 * specializations of templates and for implicit instantiations of the template,
4231 * both of which are referred to as "specializations". For a class template
4232 * specialization (e.g., \c std::vector<bool>), this routine will return
4233 * either the primary template (\c std::vector) or, if the specialization was
4234 * instantiated from a class template partial specialization, the class template
4235 * partial specialization. For a class template partial specialization and a
4236 * function template specialization (including instantiations), this
4237 * this routine will return the specialized template.
4238 *
4239 * For members of a class template (e.g., member functions, member classes, or
4240 * static data members), returns the specialized or instantiated member.
4241 * Although not strictly "templates" in the C++ language, members of class
4242 * templates have the same notions of specializations and instantiations that
4243 * templates do, so this routine treats them similarly.
4244 *
4245 * \param C A cursor that may be a specialization of a template or a member
4246 * of a template.
4247 *
4248 * \returns If the given cursor is a specialization or instantiation of a
4249 * template or a member thereof, the template or member that it specializes or
4250 * from which it was instantiated. Otherwise, returns a NULL cursor.
4251 */
4252CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getSpecializedCursorTemplate(CXCursor C);
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004253
4254/**
4255 * \brief Given a cursor that references something else, return the source range
4256 * covering that reference.
4257 *
4258 * \param C A cursor pointing to a member reference, a declaration reference, or
4259 * an operator call.
4260 * \param NameFlags A bitset with three independent flags:
4261 * CXNameRange_WantQualifier, CXNameRange_WantTemplateArgs, and
4262 * CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece.
4263 * \param PieceIndex For contiguous names or when passing the flag
4264 * CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece, only one piece with index 0 is
4265 * available. When the CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece flag is not passed for a
Benjamin Kramer474261a2012-06-02 10:20:41 +00004266 * non-contiguous names, this index can be used to retrieve the individual
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004267 * pieces of the name. See also CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece.
4268 *
4269 * \returns The piece of the name pointed to by the given cursor. If there is no
4270 * name, or if the PieceIndex is out-of-range, a null-cursor will be returned.
4271 */
Francois Pichetece689f2011-07-25 22:00:44 +00004272CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getCursorReferenceNameRange(CXCursor C,
4273 unsigned NameFlags,
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004274 unsigned PieceIndex);
4275
4276enum CXNameRefFlags {
4277 /**
4278 * \brief Include the nested-name-specifier, e.g. Foo:: in x.Foo::y, in the
4279 * range.
4280 */
4281 CXNameRange_WantQualifier = 0x1,
4282
4283 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00004284 * \brief Include the explicit template arguments, e.g. \<int> in x.f<int>,
4285 * in the range.
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004286 */
4287 CXNameRange_WantTemplateArgs = 0x2,
4288
4289 /**
4290 * \brief If the name is non-contiguous, return the full spanning range.
4291 *
4292 * Non-contiguous names occur in Objective-C when a selector with two or more
4293 * parameters is used, or in C++ when using an operator:
4294 * \code
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00004295 * [object doSomething:here withValue:there]; // Objective-C
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004296 * return some_vector[1]; // C++
4297 * \endcode
4298 */
4299 CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece = 0x4
4300};
Douglas Gregord3f48bd2010-09-02 00:07:54 +00004301
4302/**
Ted Kremenek9cfe9e62010-05-17 20:06:56 +00004303 * @}
4304 */
4305
4306/**
Douglas Gregor61656112010-01-26 18:31:56 +00004307 * \defgroup CINDEX_LEX Token extraction and manipulation
4308 *
4309 * The routines in this group provide access to the tokens within a
4310 * translation unit, along with a semantic mapping of those tokens to
4311 * their corresponding cursors.
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004312 *
4313 * @{
4314 */
4315
4316/**
4317 * \brief Describes a kind of token.
4318 */
4319typedef enum CXTokenKind {
4320 /**
4321 * \brief A token that contains some kind of punctuation.
4322 */
4323 CXToken_Punctuation,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004324
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004325 /**
Douglas Gregor61656112010-01-26 18:31:56 +00004326 * \brief A language keyword.
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004327 */
4328 CXToken_Keyword,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004329
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004330 /**
4331 * \brief An identifier (that is not a keyword).
4332 */
4333 CXToken_Identifier,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004334
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004335 /**
4336 * \brief A numeric, string, or character literal.
4337 */
4338 CXToken_Literal,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004339
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004340 /**
4341 * \brief A comment.
4342 */
4343 CXToken_Comment
4344} CXTokenKind;
4345
4346/**
4347 * \brief Describes a single preprocessing token.
4348 */
4349typedef struct {
4350 unsigned int_data[4];
4351 void *ptr_data;
4352} CXToken;
4353
4354/**
4355 * \brief Determine the kind of the given token.
4356 */
4357CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTokenKind clang_getTokenKind(CXToken);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004358
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004359/**
4360 * \brief Determine the spelling of the given token.
4361 *
4362 * The spelling of a token is the textual representation of that token, e.g.,
4363 * the text of an identifier or keyword.
4364 */
4365CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTokenSpelling(CXTranslationUnit, CXToken);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004366
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004367/**
4368 * \brief Retrieve the source location of the given token.
4369 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004370CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getTokenLocation(CXTranslationUnit,
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004371 CXToken);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004372
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004373/**
4374 * \brief Retrieve a source range that covers the given token.
4375 */
4376CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getTokenExtent(CXTranslationUnit, CXToken);
4377
4378/**
4379 * \brief Tokenize the source code described by the given range into raw
4380 * lexical tokens.
4381 *
4382 * \param TU the translation unit whose text is being tokenized.
4383 *
4384 * \param Range the source range in which text should be tokenized. All of the
4385 * tokens produced by tokenization will fall within this source range,
4386 *
4387 * \param Tokens this pointer will be set to point to the array of tokens
4388 * that occur within the given source range. The returned pointer must be
4389 * freed with clang_disposeTokens() before the translation unit is destroyed.
4390 *
4391 * \param NumTokens will be set to the number of tokens in the \c *Tokens
4392 * array.
4393 *
4394 */
4395CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_tokenize(CXTranslationUnit TU, CXSourceRange Range,
4396 CXToken **Tokens, unsigned *NumTokens);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004397
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004398/**
4399 * \brief Annotate the given set of tokens by providing cursors for each token
4400 * that can be mapped to a specific entity within the abstract syntax tree.
4401 *
Douglas Gregor61656112010-01-26 18:31:56 +00004402 * This token-annotation routine is equivalent to invoking
4403 * clang_getCursor() for the source locations of each of the
4404 * tokens. The cursors provided are filtered, so that only those
4405 * cursors that have a direct correspondence to the token are
4406 * accepted. For example, given a function call \c f(x),
4407 * clang_getCursor() would provide the following cursors:
4408 *
4409 * * when the cursor is over the 'f', a DeclRefExpr cursor referring to 'f'.
4410 * * when the cursor is over the '(' or the ')', a CallExpr referring to 'f'.
4411 * * when the cursor is over the 'x', a DeclRefExpr cursor referring to 'x'.
4412 *
4413 * Only the first and last of these cursors will occur within the
4414 * annotate, since the tokens "f" and "x' directly refer to a function
4415 * and a variable, respectively, but the parentheses are just a small
4416 * part of the full syntax of the function call expression, which is
4417 * not provided as an annotation.
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004418 *
4419 * \param TU the translation unit that owns the given tokens.
4420 *
4421 * \param Tokens the set of tokens to annotate.
4422 *
4423 * \param NumTokens the number of tokens in \p Tokens.
4424 *
4425 * \param Cursors an array of \p NumTokens cursors, whose contents will be
4426 * replaced with the cursors corresponding to each token.
4427 */
4428CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_annotateTokens(CXTranslationUnit TU,
4429 CXToken *Tokens, unsigned NumTokens,
4430 CXCursor *Cursors);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004431
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004432/**
4433 * \brief Free the given set of tokens.
4434 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004435CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeTokens(CXTranslationUnit TU,
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004436 CXToken *Tokens, unsigned NumTokens);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004437
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004438/**
4439 * @}
4440 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004441
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004442/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004443 * \defgroup CINDEX_DEBUG Debugging facilities
4444 *
4445 * These routines are used for testing and debugging, only, and should not
4446 * be relied upon.
4447 *
4448 * @{
4449 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004450
Steve Naroff76b8f132009-09-23 17:52:52 +00004451/* for debug/testing */
Ted Kremenek29004672010-02-17 00:41:32 +00004452CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorKindSpelling(enum CXCursorKind Kind);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004453CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getDefinitionSpellingAndExtent(CXCursor,
4454 const char **startBuf,
Steve Naroff76b8f132009-09-23 17:52:52 +00004455 const char **endBuf,
4456 unsigned *startLine,
4457 unsigned *startColumn,
4458 unsigned *endLine,
4459 unsigned *endColumn);
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +00004460CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_enableStackTraces(void);
Daniel Dunbar23420652010-11-04 01:26:29 +00004461CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_executeOnThread(void (*fn)(void*), void *user_data,
4462 unsigned stack_size);
4463
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004464/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004465 * @}
4466 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004467
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004468/**
4469 * \defgroup CINDEX_CODE_COMPLET Code completion
4470 *
4471 * Code completion involves taking an (incomplete) source file, along with
4472 * knowledge of where the user is actively editing that file, and suggesting
4473 * syntactically- and semantically-valid constructs that the user might want to
4474 * use at that particular point in the source code. These data structures and
4475 * routines provide support for code completion.
4476 *
4477 * @{
4478 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004479
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004480/**
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004481 * \brief A semantic string that describes a code-completion result.
4482 *
4483 * A semantic string that describes the formatting of a code-completion
4484 * result as a single "template" of text that should be inserted into the
4485 * source buffer when a particular code-completion result is selected.
4486 * Each semantic string is made up of some number of "chunks", each of which
4487 * contains some text along with a description of what that text means, e.g.,
4488 * the name of the entity being referenced, whether the text chunk is part of
4489 * the template, or whether it is a "placeholder" that the user should replace
4490 * with actual code,of a specific kind. See \c CXCompletionChunkKind for a
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004491 * description of the different kinds of chunks.
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004492 */
4493typedef void *CXCompletionString;
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004494
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004495/**
4496 * \brief A single result of code completion.
4497 */
4498typedef struct {
4499 /**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004500 * \brief The kind of entity that this completion refers to.
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004501 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004502 * The cursor kind will be a macro, keyword, or a declaration (one of the
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004503 * *Decl cursor kinds), describing the entity that the completion is
4504 * referring to.
4505 *
4506 * \todo In the future, we would like to provide a full cursor, to allow
4507 * the client to extract additional information from declaration.
4508 */
4509 enum CXCursorKind CursorKind;
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004510
4511 /**
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004512 * \brief The code-completion string that describes how to insert this
4513 * code-completion result into the editing buffer.
4514 */
4515 CXCompletionString CompletionString;
4516} CXCompletionResult;
4517
4518/**
4519 * \brief Describes a single piece of text within a code-completion string.
4520 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004521 * Each "chunk" within a code-completion string (\c CXCompletionString) is
4522 * either a piece of text with a specific "kind" that describes how that text
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004523 * should be interpreted by the client or is another completion string.
4524 */
4525enum CXCompletionChunkKind {
4526 /**
4527 * \brief A code-completion string that describes "optional" text that
4528 * could be a part of the template (but is not required).
4529 *
4530 * The Optional chunk is the only kind of chunk that has a code-completion
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004531 * string for its representation, which is accessible via
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004532 * \c clang_getCompletionChunkCompletionString(). The code-completion string
4533 * describes an additional part of the template that is completely optional.
4534 * For example, optional chunks can be used to describe the placeholders for
4535 * arguments that match up with defaulted function parameters, e.g. given:
4536 *
4537 * \code
4538 * void f(int x, float y = 3.14, double z = 2.71828);
4539 * \endcode
4540 *
4541 * The code-completion string for this function would contain:
4542 * - a TypedText chunk for "f".
4543 * - a LeftParen chunk for "(".
4544 * - a Placeholder chunk for "int x"
4545 * - an Optional chunk containing the remaining defaulted arguments, e.g.,
4546 * - a Comma chunk for ","
Daniel Dunbar4053fae2010-02-17 08:07:44 +00004547 * - a Placeholder chunk for "float y"
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004548 * - an Optional chunk containing the last defaulted argument:
4549 * - a Comma chunk for ","
4550 * - a Placeholder chunk for "double z"
4551 * - a RightParen chunk for ")"
4552 *
Daniel Dunbar4053fae2010-02-17 08:07:44 +00004553 * There are many ways to handle Optional chunks. Two simple approaches are:
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004554 * - Completely ignore optional chunks, in which case the template for the
4555 * function "f" would only include the first parameter ("int x").
4556 * - Fully expand all optional chunks, in which case the template for the
4557 * function "f" would have all of the parameters.
4558 */
4559 CXCompletionChunk_Optional,
4560 /**
4561 * \brief Text that a user would be expected to type to get this
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004562 * code-completion result.
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004563 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004564 * There will be exactly one "typed text" chunk in a semantic string, which
4565 * will typically provide the spelling of a keyword or the name of a
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004566 * declaration that could be used at the current code point. Clients are
4567 * expected to filter the code-completion results based on the text in this
4568 * chunk.
4569 */
4570 CXCompletionChunk_TypedText,
4571 /**
4572 * \brief Text that should be inserted as part of a code-completion result.
4573 *
4574 * A "text" chunk represents text that is part of the template to be
4575 * inserted into user code should this particular code-completion result
4576 * be selected.
4577 */
4578 CXCompletionChunk_Text,
4579 /**
4580 * \brief Placeholder text that should be replaced by the user.
4581 *
4582 * A "placeholder" chunk marks a place where the user should insert text
4583 * into the code-completion template. For example, placeholders might mark
4584 * the function parameters for a function declaration, to indicate that the
4585 * user should provide arguments for each of those parameters. The actual
4586 * text in a placeholder is a suggestion for the text to display before
4587 * the user replaces the placeholder with real code.
4588 */
4589 CXCompletionChunk_Placeholder,
4590 /**
4591 * \brief Informative text that should be displayed but never inserted as
4592 * part of the template.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004593 *
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004594 * An "informative" chunk contains annotations that can be displayed to
4595 * help the user decide whether a particular code-completion result is the
4596 * right option, but which is not part of the actual template to be inserted
4597 * by code completion.
4598 */
4599 CXCompletionChunk_Informative,
4600 /**
4601 * \brief Text that describes the current parameter when code-completion is
4602 * referring to function call, message send, or template specialization.
4603 *
4604 * A "current parameter" chunk occurs when code-completion is providing
4605 * information about a parameter corresponding to the argument at the
4606 * code-completion point. For example, given a function
4607 *
4608 * \code
4609 * int add(int x, int y);
4610 * \endcode
4611 *
4612 * and the source code \c add(, where the code-completion point is after the
4613 * "(", the code-completion string will contain a "current parameter" chunk
4614 * for "int x", indicating that the current argument will initialize that
4615 * parameter. After typing further, to \c add(17, (where the code-completion
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004616 * point is after the ","), the code-completion string will contain a
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004617 * "current paremeter" chunk to "int y".
4618 */
4619 CXCompletionChunk_CurrentParameter,
4620 /**
4621 * \brief A left parenthesis ('('), used to initiate a function call or
4622 * signal the beginning of a function parameter list.
4623 */
4624 CXCompletionChunk_LeftParen,
4625 /**
4626 * \brief A right parenthesis (')'), used to finish a function call or
4627 * signal the end of a function parameter list.
4628 */
4629 CXCompletionChunk_RightParen,
4630 /**
4631 * \brief A left bracket ('[').
4632 */
4633 CXCompletionChunk_LeftBracket,
4634 /**
4635 * \brief A right bracket (']').
4636 */
4637 CXCompletionChunk_RightBracket,
4638 /**
4639 * \brief A left brace ('{').
4640 */
4641 CXCompletionChunk_LeftBrace,
4642 /**
4643 * \brief A right brace ('}').
4644 */
4645 CXCompletionChunk_RightBrace,
4646 /**
4647 * \brief A left angle bracket ('<').
4648 */
4649 CXCompletionChunk_LeftAngle,
4650 /**
4651 * \brief A right angle bracket ('>').
4652 */
4653 CXCompletionChunk_RightAngle,
4654 /**
4655 * \brief A comma separator (',').
4656 */
Douglas Gregorb3fa9192009-12-18 18:53:37 +00004657 CXCompletionChunk_Comma,
4658 /**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004659 * \brief Text that specifies the result type of a given result.
Douglas Gregorb3fa9192009-12-18 18:53:37 +00004660 *
4661 * This special kind of informative chunk is not meant to be inserted into
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004662 * the text buffer. Rather, it is meant to illustrate the type that an
Douglas Gregorb3fa9192009-12-18 18:53:37 +00004663 * expression using the given completion string would have.
4664 */
Douglas Gregor504a6ae2010-01-10 23:08:15 +00004665 CXCompletionChunk_ResultType,
4666 /**
4667 * \brief A colon (':').
4668 */
4669 CXCompletionChunk_Colon,
4670 /**
4671 * \brief A semicolon (';').
4672 */
4673 CXCompletionChunk_SemiColon,
4674 /**
4675 * \brief An '=' sign.
4676 */
4677 CXCompletionChunk_Equal,
4678 /**
4679 * Horizontal space (' ').
4680 */
4681 CXCompletionChunk_HorizontalSpace,
4682 /**
4683 * Vertical space ('\n'), after which it is generally a good idea to
4684 * perform indentation.
4685 */
4686 CXCompletionChunk_VerticalSpace
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004687};
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004688
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004689/**
4690 * \brief Determine the kind of a particular chunk within a completion string.
4691 *
4692 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4693 *
4694 * \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string.
4695 *
4696 * \returns the kind of the chunk at the index \c chunk_number.
4697 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004698CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCompletionChunkKind
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004699clang_getCompletionChunkKind(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4700 unsigned chunk_number);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004701
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004702/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004703 * \brief Retrieve the text associated with a particular chunk within a
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004704 * completion string.
4705 *
4706 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4707 *
4708 * \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string.
4709 *
4710 * \returns the text associated with the chunk at index \c chunk_number.
4711 */
Ted Kremenekf602f962010-02-17 01:42:24 +00004712CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004713clang_getCompletionChunkText(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4714 unsigned chunk_number);
4715
4716/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004717 * \brief Retrieve the completion string associated with a particular chunk
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004718 * within a completion string.
4719 *
4720 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4721 *
4722 * \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string.
4723 *
4724 * \returns the completion string associated with the chunk at index
Erik Verbruggen98ea7f62011-10-14 15:31:08 +00004725 * \c chunk_number.
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004726 */
4727CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCompletionString
4728clang_getCompletionChunkCompletionString(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4729 unsigned chunk_number);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004730
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004731/**
4732 * \brief Retrieve the number of chunks in the given code-completion string.
4733 */
4734CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
4735clang_getNumCompletionChunks(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4736
4737/**
Douglas Gregora2db7932010-05-26 22:00:08 +00004738 * \brief Determine the priority of this code completion.
4739 *
4740 * The priority of a code completion indicates how likely it is that this
4741 * particular completion is the completion that the user will select. The
4742 * priority is selected by various internal heuristics.
4743 *
4744 * \param completion_string The completion string to query.
4745 *
4746 * \returns The priority of this completion string. Smaller values indicate
4747 * higher-priority (more likely) completions.
4748 */
4749CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
4750clang_getCompletionPriority(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4751
4752/**
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +00004753 * \brief Determine the availability of the entity that this code-completion
4754 * string refers to.
4755 *
4756 * \param completion_string The completion string to query.
4757 *
4758 * \returns The availability of the completion string.
4759 */
4760CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXAvailabilityKind
4761clang_getCompletionAvailability(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4762
4763/**
Erik Verbruggen98ea7f62011-10-14 15:31:08 +00004764 * \brief Retrieve the number of annotations associated with the given
4765 * completion string.
4766 *
4767 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4768 *
4769 * \returns the number of annotations associated with the given completion
4770 * string.
4771 */
4772CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
4773clang_getCompletionNumAnnotations(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4774
4775/**
4776 * \brief Retrieve the annotation associated with the given completion string.
4777 *
4778 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4779 *
4780 * \param annotation_number the 0-based index of the annotation of the
4781 * completion string.
4782 *
4783 * \returns annotation string associated with the completion at index
4784 * \c annotation_number, or a NULL string if that annotation is not available.
4785 */
4786CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
4787clang_getCompletionAnnotation(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4788 unsigned annotation_number);
4789
4790/**
Douglas Gregor78254c82012-03-27 23:34:16 +00004791 * \brief Retrieve the parent context of the given completion string.
4792 *
4793 * The parent context of a completion string is the semantic parent of
4794 * the declaration (if any) that the code completion represents. For example,
4795 * a code completion for an Objective-C method would have the method's class
4796 * or protocol as its context.
4797 *
4798 * \param completion_string The code completion string whose parent is
4799 * being queried.
4800 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ae39562012-09-26 16:39:56 +00004801 * \param kind DEPRECATED: always set to CXCursor_NotImplemented if non-NULL.
Douglas Gregor78254c82012-03-27 23:34:16 +00004802 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00004803 * \returns The name of the completion parent, e.g., "NSObject" if
Douglas Gregor78254c82012-03-27 23:34:16 +00004804 * the completion string represents a method in the NSObject class.
4805 */
4806CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
4807clang_getCompletionParent(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4808 enum CXCursorKind *kind);
Dmitri Gribenko3292d062012-07-02 17:35:10 +00004809
4810/**
4811 * \brief Retrieve the brief documentation comment attached to the declaration
4812 * that corresponds to the given completion string.
4813 */
4814CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
4815clang_getCompletionBriefComment(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4816
Douglas Gregor78254c82012-03-27 23:34:16 +00004817/**
Douglas Gregor3f35bb22011-08-04 20:04:59 +00004818 * \brief Retrieve a completion string for an arbitrary declaration or macro
4819 * definition cursor.
4820 *
4821 * \param cursor The cursor to query.
4822 *
4823 * \returns A non-context-sensitive completion string for declaration and macro
4824 * definition cursors, or NULL for other kinds of cursors.
4825 */
4826CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCompletionString
4827clang_getCursorCompletionString(CXCursor cursor);
4828
4829/**
Douglas Gregorf72b6ac2009-12-18 16:20:58 +00004830 * \brief Contains the results of code-completion.
4831 *
4832 * This data structure contains the results of code completion, as
Douglas Gregor6a9580282010-10-11 21:51:20 +00004833 * produced by \c clang_codeCompleteAt(). Its contents must be freed by
Douglas Gregorf72b6ac2009-12-18 16:20:58 +00004834 * \c clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults.
4835 */
4836typedef struct {
4837 /**
4838 * \brief The code-completion results.
4839 */
4840 CXCompletionResult *Results;
4841
4842 /**
4843 * \brief The number of code-completion results stored in the
4844 * \c Results array.
4845 */
4846 unsigned NumResults;
4847} CXCodeCompleteResults;
4848
4849/**
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00004850 * \brief Flags that can be passed to \c clang_codeCompleteAt() to
4851 * modify its behavior.
4852 *
4853 * The enumerators in this enumeration can be bitwise-OR'd together to
4854 * provide multiple options to \c clang_codeCompleteAt().
4855 */
4856enum CXCodeComplete_Flags {
4857 /**
4858 * \brief Whether to include macros within the set of code
4859 * completions returned.
4860 */
4861 CXCodeComplete_IncludeMacros = 0x01,
4862
4863 /**
4864 * \brief Whether to include code patterns for language constructs
4865 * within the set of code completions, e.g., for loops.
4866 */
Dmitri Gribenko3292d062012-07-02 17:35:10 +00004867 CXCodeComplete_IncludeCodePatterns = 0x02,
4868
4869 /**
4870 * \brief Whether to include brief documentation within the set of code
4871 * completions returned.
4872 */
4873 CXCodeComplete_IncludeBriefComments = 0x04
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00004874};
4875
4876/**
Douglas Gregor21325842011-07-07 16:03:39 +00004877 * \brief Bits that represent the context under which completion is occurring.
4878 *
4879 * The enumerators in this enumeration may be bitwise-OR'd together if multiple
4880 * contexts are occurring simultaneously.
4881 */
4882enum CXCompletionContext {
4883 /**
4884 * \brief The context for completions is unexposed, as only Clang results
4885 * should be included. (This is equivalent to having no context bits set.)
4886 */
4887 CXCompletionContext_Unexposed = 0,
4888
4889 /**
4890 * \brief Completions for any possible type should be included in the results.
4891 */
4892 CXCompletionContext_AnyType = 1 << 0,
4893
4894 /**
4895 * \brief Completions for any possible value (variables, function calls, etc.)
4896 * should be included in the results.
4897 */
4898 CXCompletionContext_AnyValue = 1 << 1,
4899 /**
4900 * \brief Completions for values that resolve to an Objective-C object should
4901 * be included in the results.
4902 */
4903 CXCompletionContext_ObjCObjectValue = 1 << 2,
4904 /**
4905 * \brief Completions for values that resolve to an Objective-C selector
4906 * should be included in the results.
4907 */
4908 CXCompletionContext_ObjCSelectorValue = 1 << 3,
4909 /**
4910 * \brief Completions for values that resolve to a C++ class type should be
4911 * included in the results.
4912 */
4913 CXCompletionContext_CXXClassTypeValue = 1 << 4,
4914
4915 /**
4916 * \brief Completions for fields of the member being accessed using the dot
4917 * operator should be included in the results.
4918 */
4919 CXCompletionContext_DotMemberAccess = 1 << 5,
4920 /**
4921 * \brief Completions for fields of the member being accessed using the arrow
4922 * operator should be included in the results.
4923 */
4924 CXCompletionContext_ArrowMemberAccess = 1 << 6,
4925 /**
4926 * \brief Completions for properties of the Objective-C object being accessed
4927 * using the dot operator should be included in the results.
4928 */
4929 CXCompletionContext_ObjCPropertyAccess = 1 << 7,
4930
4931 /**
4932 * \brief Completions for enum tags should be included in the results.
4933 */
4934 CXCompletionContext_EnumTag = 1 << 8,
4935 /**
4936 * \brief Completions for union tags should be included in the results.
4937 */
4938 CXCompletionContext_UnionTag = 1 << 9,
4939 /**
4940 * \brief Completions for struct tags should be included in the results.
4941 */
4942 CXCompletionContext_StructTag = 1 << 10,
4943
4944 /**
4945 * \brief Completions for C++ class names should be included in the results.
4946 */
4947 CXCompletionContext_ClassTag = 1 << 11,
4948 /**
4949 * \brief Completions for C++ namespaces and namespace aliases should be
4950 * included in the results.
4951 */
4952 CXCompletionContext_Namespace = 1 << 12,
4953 /**
4954 * \brief Completions for C++ nested name specifiers should be included in
4955 * the results.
4956 */
4957 CXCompletionContext_NestedNameSpecifier = 1 << 13,
4958
4959 /**
4960 * \brief Completions for Objective-C interfaces (classes) should be included
4961 * in the results.
4962 */
4963 CXCompletionContext_ObjCInterface = 1 << 14,
4964 /**
4965 * \brief Completions for Objective-C protocols should be included in
4966 * the results.
4967 */
4968 CXCompletionContext_ObjCProtocol = 1 << 15,
4969 /**
4970 * \brief Completions for Objective-C categories should be included in
4971 * the results.
4972 */
4973 CXCompletionContext_ObjCCategory = 1 << 16,
4974 /**
4975 * \brief Completions for Objective-C instance messages should be included
4976 * in the results.
4977 */
4978 CXCompletionContext_ObjCInstanceMessage = 1 << 17,
4979 /**
4980 * \brief Completions for Objective-C class messages should be included in
4981 * the results.
4982 */
4983 CXCompletionContext_ObjCClassMessage = 1 << 18,
4984 /**
4985 * \brief Completions for Objective-C selector names should be included in
4986 * the results.
4987 */
4988 CXCompletionContext_ObjCSelectorName = 1 << 19,
4989
4990 /**
4991 * \brief Completions for preprocessor macro names should be included in
4992 * the results.
4993 */
4994 CXCompletionContext_MacroName = 1 << 20,
4995
4996 /**
4997 * \brief Natural language completions should be included in the results.
4998 */
4999 CXCompletionContext_NaturalLanguage = 1 << 21,
5000
5001 /**
5002 * \brief The current context is unknown, so set all contexts.
5003 */
5004 CXCompletionContext_Unknown = ((1 << 22) - 1)
5005};
5006
5007/**
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00005008 * \brief Returns a default set of code-completion options that can be
5009 * passed to\c clang_codeCompleteAt().
5010 */
5011CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultCodeCompleteOptions(void);
5012
5013/**
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00005014 * \brief Perform code completion at a given location in a translation unit.
5015 *
5016 * This function performs code completion at a particular file, line, and
5017 * column within source code, providing results that suggest potential
5018 * code snippets based on the context of the completion. The basic model
5019 * for code completion is that Clang will parse a complete source file,
5020 * performing syntax checking up to the location where code-completion has
5021 * been requested. At that point, a special code-completion token is passed
5022 * to the parser, which recognizes this token and determines, based on the
5023 * current location in the C/Objective-C/C++ grammar and the state of
5024 * semantic analysis, what completions to provide. These completions are
5025 * returned via a new \c CXCodeCompleteResults structure.
5026 *
5027 * Code completion itself is meant to be triggered by the client when the
5028 * user types punctuation characters or whitespace, at which point the
5029 * code-completion location will coincide with the cursor. For example, if \c p
5030 * is a pointer, code-completion might be triggered after the "-" and then
5031 * after the ">" in \c p->. When the code-completion location is afer the ">",
5032 * the completion results will provide, e.g., the members of the struct that
5033 * "p" points to. The client is responsible for placing the cursor at the
5034 * beginning of the token currently being typed, then filtering the results
5035 * based on the contents of the token. For example, when code-completing for
5036 * the expression \c p->get, the client should provide the location just after
5037 * the ">" (e.g., pointing at the "g") to this code-completion hook. Then, the
5038 * client can filter the results based on the current token text ("get"), only
5039 * showing those results that start with "get". The intent of this interface
5040 * is to separate the relatively high-latency acquisition of code-completion
5041 * results from the filtering of results on a per-character basis, which must
5042 * have a lower latency.
5043 *
5044 * \param TU The translation unit in which code-completion should
5045 * occur. The source files for this translation unit need not be
5046 * completely up-to-date (and the contents of those source files may
5047 * be overridden via \p unsaved_files). Cursors referring into the
5048 * translation unit may be invalidated by this invocation.
5049 *
5050 * \param complete_filename The name of the source file where code
5051 * completion should be performed. This filename may be any file
5052 * included in the translation unit.
5053 *
5054 * \param complete_line The line at which code-completion should occur.
5055 *
5056 * \param complete_column The column at which code-completion should occur.
5057 * Note that the column should point just after the syntactic construct that
5058 * initiated code completion, and not in the middle of a lexical token.
5059 *
Vedant Kumarcbfe7bb2016-03-23 23:51:36 +00005060 * \param unsaved_files the Files that have not yet been saved to disk
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00005061 * but may be required for parsing or code completion, including the
5062 * contents of those files. The contents and name of these files (as
5063 * specified by CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the
5064 * client only needs to guarantee their validity until the call to
5065 * this function returns.
5066 *
5067 * \param num_unsaved_files The number of unsaved file entries in \p
5068 * unsaved_files.
5069 *
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00005070 * \param options Extra options that control the behavior of code
5071 * completion, expressed as a bitwise OR of the enumerators of the
5072 * CXCodeComplete_Flags enumeration. The
5073 * \c clang_defaultCodeCompleteOptions() function returns a default set
5074 * of code-completion options.
5075 *
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00005076 * \returns If successful, a new \c CXCodeCompleteResults structure
5077 * containing code-completion results, which should eventually be
5078 * freed with \c clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults(). If code
5079 * completion fails, returns NULL.
5080 */
5081CINDEX_LINKAGE
5082CXCodeCompleteResults *clang_codeCompleteAt(CXTranslationUnit TU,
5083 const char *complete_filename,
5084 unsigned complete_line,
5085 unsigned complete_column,
5086 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00005087 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
5088 unsigned options);
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00005089
5090/**
Douglas Gregor49f67ce2010-08-26 13:48:20 +00005091 * \brief Sort the code-completion results in case-insensitive alphabetical
5092 * order.
5093 *
5094 * \param Results The set of results to sort.
5095 * \param NumResults The number of results in \p Results.
5096 */
5097CINDEX_LINKAGE
5098void clang_sortCodeCompletionResults(CXCompletionResult *Results,
5099 unsigned NumResults);
5100
5101/**
Douglas Gregorf72b6ac2009-12-18 16:20:58 +00005102 * \brief Free the given set of code-completion results.
5103 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00005104CINDEX_LINKAGE
Douglas Gregorf72b6ac2009-12-18 16:20:58 +00005105void clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +00005106
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +00005107/**
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00005108 * \brief Determine the number of diagnostics produced prior to the
5109 * location where code completion was performed.
5110 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00005111CINDEX_LINKAGE
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00005112unsigned clang_codeCompleteGetNumDiagnostics(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
5113
5114/**
5115 * \brief Retrieve a diagnostic associated with the given code completion.
5116 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005117 * \param Results the code completion results to query.
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00005118 * \param Index the zero-based diagnostic number to retrieve.
5119 *
5120 * \returns the requested diagnostic. This diagnostic must be freed
5121 * via a call to \c clang_disposeDiagnostic().
5122 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00005123CINDEX_LINKAGE
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00005124CXDiagnostic clang_codeCompleteGetDiagnostic(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results,
5125 unsigned Index);
5126
5127/**
Nico Weberdd9c19f2014-04-24 03:06:18 +00005128 * \brief Determines what completions are appropriate for the context
Douglas Gregor21325842011-07-07 16:03:39 +00005129 * the given code completion.
5130 *
5131 * \param Results the code completion results to query
5132 *
5133 * \returns the kinds of completions that are appropriate for use
5134 * along with the given code completion results.
5135 */
5136CINDEX_LINKAGE
5137unsigned long long clang_codeCompleteGetContexts(
5138 CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
Douglas Gregor63745d52011-07-21 01:05:26 +00005139
5140/**
5141 * \brief Returns the cursor kind for the container for the current code
5142 * completion context. The container is only guaranteed to be set for
5143 * contexts where a container exists (i.e. member accesses or Objective-C
5144 * message sends); if there is not a container, this function will return
5145 * CXCursor_InvalidCode.
5146 *
5147 * \param Results the code completion results to query
5148 *
5149 * \param IsIncomplete on return, this value will be false if Clang has complete
5150 * information about the container. If Clang does not have complete
5151 * information, this value will be true.
5152 *
5153 * \returns the container kind, or CXCursor_InvalidCode if there is not a
5154 * container
5155 */
5156CINDEX_LINKAGE
5157enum CXCursorKind clang_codeCompleteGetContainerKind(
5158 CXCodeCompleteResults *Results,
5159 unsigned *IsIncomplete);
5160
5161/**
5162 * \brief Returns the USR for the container for the current code completion
5163 * context. If there is not a container for the current context, this
5164 * function will return the empty string.
5165 *
5166 * \param Results the code completion results to query
5167 *
5168 * \returns the USR for the container
5169 */
5170CINDEX_LINKAGE
5171CXString clang_codeCompleteGetContainerUSR(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
NAKAMURA Takumiaa13f942015-12-09 07:52:46 +00005172
Douglas Gregorea777402011-07-26 15:24:30 +00005173/**
5174 * \brief Returns the currently-entered selector for an Objective-C message
5175 * send, formatted like "initWithFoo:bar:". Only guaranteed to return a
5176 * non-empty string for CXCompletionContext_ObjCInstanceMessage and
5177 * CXCompletionContext_ObjCClassMessage.
5178 *
5179 * \param Results the code completion results to query
5180 *
5181 * \returns the selector (or partial selector) that has been entered thus far
5182 * for an Objective-C message send.
5183 */
5184CINDEX_LINKAGE
5185CXString clang_codeCompleteGetObjCSelector(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
5186
Douglas Gregor21325842011-07-07 16:03:39 +00005187/**
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +00005188 * @}
5189 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00005190
Ted Kremenekc0f3f722010-01-22 22:44:15 +00005191/**
5192 * \defgroup CINDEX_MISC Miscellaneous utility functions
5193 *
5194 * @{
5195 */
Ted Kremenek3e315a22010-01-23 17:51:23 +00005196
5197/**
5198 * \brief Return a version string, suitable for showing to a user, but not
5199 * intended to be parsed (the format is not guaranteed to be stable).
5200 */
NAKAMURA Takumieacd6672013-01-10 02:12:38 +00005201CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getClangVersion(void);
Ted Kremenekc0f3f722010-01-22 22:44:15 +00005202
Ted Kremenek1ec7b332011-03-18 23:05:39 +00005203/**
5204 * \brief Enable/disable crash recovery.
5205 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005206 * \param isEnabled Flag to indicate if crash recovery is enabled. A non-zero
5207 * value enables crash recovery, while 0 disables it.
Ted Kremenek1ec7b332011-03-18 23:05:39 +00005208 */
5209CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_toggleCrashRecovery(unsigned isEnabled);
5210
Ted Kremenek0b86e3a2010-01-26 19:31:51 +00005211 /**
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00005212 * \brief Visitor invoked for each file in a translation unit
Ted Kremenek0b86e3a2010-01-26 19:31:51 +00005213 * (used with clang_getInclusions()).
5214 *
5215 * This visitor function will be invoked by clang_getInclusions() for each
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005216 * file included (either at the top-level or by \#include directives) within
Ted Kremenek0b86e3a2010-01-26 19:31:51 +00005217 * a translation unit. The first argument is the file being included, and
5218 * the second and third arguments provide the inclusion stack. The
5219 * array is sorted in order of immediate inclusion. For example,
5220 * the first element refers to the location that included 'included_file'.
5221 */
5222typedef void (*CXInclusionVisitor)(CXFile included_file,
5223 CXSourceLocation* inclusion_stack,
5224 unsigned include_len,
5225 CXClientData client_data);
5226
5227/**
5228 * \brief Visit the set of preprocessor inclusions in a translation unit.
5229 * The visitor function is called with the provided data for every included
5230 * file. This does not include headers included by the PCH file (unless one
5231 * is inspecting the inclusions in the PCH file itself).
5232 */
5233CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getInclusions(CXTranslationUnit tu,
5234 CXInclusionVisitor visitor,
5235 CXClientData client_data);
5236
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00005237typedef enum {
5238 CXEval_Int = 1 ,
5239 CXEval_Float = 2,
5240 CXEval_ObjCStrLiteral = 3,
5241 CXEval_StrLiteral = 4,
5242 CXEval_CFStr = 5,
5243 CXEval_Other = 6,
5244
5245 CXEval_UnExposed = 0
5246
5247} CXEvalResultKind ;
5248
5249/**
5250 * \brief Evaluation result of a cursor
5251 */
5252typedef void * CXEvalResult;
5253
5254/**
5255 * \brief If cursor is a statement declaration tries to evaluate the
5256 * statement and if its variable, tries to evaluate its initializer,
5257 * into its corresponding type.
5258 */
5259CINDEX_LINKAGE CXEvalResult clang_Cursor_Evaluate(CXCursor C);
5260
5261/**
5262 * \brief Returns the kind of the evaluated result.
5263 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisa851d7e2016-01-16 03:01:20 +00005264CINDEX_LINKAGE CXEvalResultKind clang_EvalResult_getKind(CXEvalResult E);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00005265
5266/**
5267 * \brief Returns the evaluation result as integer if the
5268 * kind is Int.
5269 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisa851d7e2016-01-16 03:01:20 +00005270CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_EvalResult_getAsInt(CXEvalResult E);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00005271
5272/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5dda1122016-12-01 23:41:27 +00005273 * \brief Returns the evaluation result as a long long integer if the
5274 * kind is Int. This prevents overflows that may happen if the result is
5275 * returned with clang_EvalResult_getAsInt.
5276 */
5277CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_EvalResult_getAsLongLong(CXEvalResult E);
5278
5279/**
5280 * \brief Returns a non-zero value if the kind is Int and the evaluation
5281 * result resulted in an unsigned integer.
5282 */
5283CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_EvalResult_isUnsignedInt(CXEvalResult E);
5284
5285/**
5286 * \brief Returns the evaluation result as an unsigned integer if
5287 * the kind is Int and clang_EvalResult_isUnsignedInt is non-zero.
5288 */
5289CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned long long clang_EvalResult_getAsUnsigned(CXEvalResult E);
5290
5291/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00005292 * \brief Returns the evaluation result as double if the
5293 * kind is double.
5294 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisa851d7e2016-01-16 03:01:20 +00005295CINDEX_LINKAGE double clang_EvalResult_getAsDouble(CXEvalResult E);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00005296
5297/**
5298 * \brief Returns the evaluation result as a constant string if the
5299 * kind is other than Int or float. User must not free this pointer,
5300 * instead call clang_EvalResult_dispose on the CXEvalResult returned
5301 * by clang_Cursor_Evaluate.
5302 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisa851d7e2016-01-16 03:01:20 +00005303CINDEX_LINKAGE const char* clang_EvalResult_getAsStr(CXEvalResult E);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00005304
5305/**
5306 * \brief Disposes the created Eval memory.
5307 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisa851d7e2016-01-16 03:01:20 +00005308CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_EvalResult_dispose(CXEvalResult E);
Ted Kremenek0b86e3a2010-01-26 19:31:51 +00005309/**
Ted Kremenekc0f3f722010-01-22 22:44:15 +00005310 * @}
5311 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00005312
Argyrios Kyrtzidisf89cc692011-07-11 20:15:00 +00005313/** \defgroup CINDEX_REMAPPING Remapping functions
5314 *
5315 * @{
5316 */
5317
5318/**
5319 * \brief A remapping of original source files and their translated files.
5320 */
5321typedef void *CXRemapping;
5322
5323/**
5324 * \brief Retrieve a remapping.
5325 *
5326 * \param path the path that contains metadata about remappings.
5327 *
5328 * \returns the requested remapping. This remapping must be freed
5329 * via a call to \c clang_remap_dispose(). Can return NULL if an error occurred.
5330 */
5331CINDEX_LINKAGE CXRemapping clang_getRemappings(const char *path);
5332
5333/**
Ted Kremenekf7639e12012-03-06 20:06:33 +00005334 * \brief Retrieve a remapping.
5335 *
5336 * \param filePaths pointer to an array of file paths containing remapping info.
5337 *
5338 * \param numFiles number of file paths.
5339 *
5340 * \returns the requested remapping. This remapping must be freed
5341 * via a call to \c clang_remap_dispose(). Can return NULL if an error occurred.
5342 */
5343CINDEX_LINKAGE
5344CXRemapping clang_getRemappingsFromFileList(const char **filePaths,
5345 unsigned numFiles);
5346
5347/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisf89cc692011-07-11 20:15:00 +00005348 * \brief Determine the number of remappings.
5349 */
5350CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_remap_getNumFiles(CXRemapping);
5351
5352/**
5353 * \brief Get the original and the associated filename from the remapping.
5354 *
5355 * \param original If non-NULL, will be set to the original filename.
5356 *
5357 * \param transformed If non-NULL, will be set to the filename that the original
5358 * is associated with.
5359 */
5360CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_remap_getFilenames(CXRemapping, unsigned index,
5361 CXString *original, CXString *transformed);
5362
5363/**
5364 * \brief Dispose the remapping.
5365 */
5366CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_remap_dispose(CXRemapping);
5367
5368/**
5369 * @}
5370 */
5371
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005372/** \defgroup CINDEX_HIGH Higher level API functions
5373 *
5374 * @{
5375 */
5376
5377enum CXVisitorResult {
5378 CXVisit_Break,
5379 CXVisit_Continue
5380};
5381
Saleem Abdulrasoolec988b72016-05-24 01:23:24 +00005382typedef struct CXCursorAndRangeVisitor {
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005383 void *context;
5384 enum CXVisitorResult (*visit)(void *context, CXCursor, CXSourceRange);
5385} CXCursorAndRangeVisitor;
5386
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005387typedef enum {
5388 /**
5389 * \brief Function returned successfully.
5390 */
5391 CXResult_Success = 0,
5392 /**
5393 * \brief One of the parameters was invalid for the function.
5394 */
5395 CXResult_Invalid = 1,
5396 /**
5397 * \brief The function was terminated by a callback (e.g. it returned
5398 * CXVisit_Break)
5399 */
5400 CXResult_VisitBreak = 2
5401
5402} CXResult;
5403
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005404/**
5405 * \brief Find references of a declaration in a specific file.
5406 *
5407 * \param cursor pointing to a declaration or a reference of one.
5408 *
5409 * \param file to search for references.
5410 *
5411 * \param visitor callback that will receive pairs of CXCursor/CXSourceRange for
5412 * each reference found.
5413 * The CXSourceRange will point inside the file; if the reference is inside
5414 * a macro (and not a macro argument) the CXSourceRange will be invalid.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis951f61f2013-03-08 20:42:33 +00005415 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005416 * \returns one of the CXResult enumerators.
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005417 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005418CINDEX_LINKAGE CXResult clang_findReferencesInFile(CXCursor cursor, CXFile file,
5419 CXCursorAndRangeVisitor visitor);
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005420
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005421/**
5422 * \brief Find #import/#include directives in a specific file.
5423 *
5424 * \param TU translation unit containing the file to query.
5425 *
5426 * \param file to search for #import/#include directives.
5427 *
5428 * \param visitor callback that will receive pairs of CXCursor/CXSourceRange for
5429 * each directive found.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis951f61f2013-03-08 20:42:33 +00005430 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005431 * \returns one of the CXResult enumerators.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005432 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005433CINDEX_LINKAGE CXResult clang_findIncludesInFile(CXTranslationUnit TU,
5434 CXFile file,
5435 CXCursorAndRangeVisitor visitor);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005436
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005437#ifdef __has_feature
5438# if __has_feature(blocks)
5439
5440typedef enum CXVisitorResult
5441 (^CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock)(CXCursor, CXSourceRange);
5442
5443CINDEX_LINKAGE
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005444CXResult clang_findReferencesInFileWithBlock(CXCursor, CXFile,
5445 CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock);
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005446
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005447CINDEX_LINKAGE
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005448CXResult clang_findIncludesInFileWithBlock(CXTranslationUnit, CXFile,
5449 CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005450
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005451# endif
5452#endif
5453
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005454/**
5455 * \brief The client's data object that is associated with a CXFile.
5456 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005457typedef void *CXIdxClientFile;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005458
5459/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005460 * \brief The client's data object that is associated with a semantic entity.
5461 */
5462typedef void *CXIdxClientEntity;
5463
5464/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005465 * \brief The client's data object that is associated with a semantic container
5466 * of entities.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005467 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005468typedef void *CXIdxClientContainer;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005469
5470/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005471 * \brief The client's data object that is associated with an AST file (PCH
5472 * or module).
5473 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005474typedef void *CXIdxClientASTFile;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005475
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005476/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005477 * \brief Source location passed to index callbacks.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005478 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005479typedef struct {
5480 void *ptr_data[2];
5481 unsigned int_data;
5482} CXIdxLoc;
5483
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005484/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005485 * \brief Data for ppIncludedFile callback.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005486 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005487typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005488 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005489 * \brief Location of '#' in the \#include/\#import directive.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005490 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005491 CXIdxLoc hashLoc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005492 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005493 * \brief Filename as written in the \#include/\#import directive.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005494 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005495 const char *filename;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005496 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005497 * \brief The actual file that the \#include/\#import directive resolved to.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005498 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005499 CXFile file;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005500 int isImport;
5501 int isAngled;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5e2ec482012-10-18 00:17:05 +00005502 /**
5503 * \brief Non-zero if the directive was automatically turned into a module
5504 * import.
5505 */
5506 int isModuleImport;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005507} CXIdxIncludedFileInfo;
5508
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005509/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005510 * \brief Data for IndexerCallbacks#importedASTFile.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005511 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005512typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005513 /**
5514 * \brief Top level AST file containing the imported PCH, module or submodule.
5515 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005516 CXFile file;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005517 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc78f3e2012-10-05 00:22:40 +00005518 * \brief The imported module or NULL if the AST file is a PCH.
5519 */
5520 CXModule module;
5521 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005522 * \brief Location where the file is imported. Applicable only for modules.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005523 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005524 CXIdxLoc loc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005525 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005526 * \brief Non-zero if an inclusion directive was automatically turned into
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc78f3e2012-10-05 00:22:40 +00005527 * a module import. Applicable only for modules.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005528 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis184b1442012-10-03 21:05:44 +00005529 int isImplicit;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005530
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005531} CXIdxImportedASTFileInfo;
5532
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005533typedef enum {
5534 CXIdxEntity_Unexposed = 0,
5535 CXIdxEntity_Typedef = 1,
5536 CXIdxEntity_Function = 2,
5537 CXIdxEntity_Variable = 3,
5538 CXIdxEntity_Field = 4,
5539 CXIdxEntity_EnumConstant = 5,
5540
5541 CXIdxEntity_ObjCClass = 6,
5542 CXIdxEntity_ObjCProtocol = 7,
5543 CXIdxEntity_ObjCCategory = 8,
5544
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005545 CXIdxEntity_ObjCInstanceMethod = 9,
5546 CXIdxEntity_ObjCClassMethod = 10,
5547 CXIdxEntity_ObjCProperty = 11,
5548 CXIdxEntity_ObjCIvar = 12,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005549
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005550 CXIdxEntity_Enum = 13,
5551 CXIdxEntity_Struct = 14,
5552 CXIdxEntity_Union = 15,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005553
5554 CXIdxEntity_CXXClass = 16,
5555 CXIdxEntity_CXXNamespace = 17,
5556 CXIdxEntity_CXXNamespaceAlias = 18,
5557 CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticVariable = 19,
5558 CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticMethod = 20,
5559 CXIdxEntity_CXXInstanceMethod = 21,
Joao Matose9a3ed42012-08-31 22:18:20 +00005560 CXIdxEntity_CXXConstructor = 22,
5561 CXIdxEntity_CXXDestructor = 23,
5562 CXIdxEntity_CXXConversionFunction = 24,
5563 CXIdxEntity_CXXTypeAlias = 25,
5564 CXIdxEntity_CXXInterface = 26
5565
5566} CXIdxEntityKind;
5567
Argyrios Kyrtzidis52002882011-12-07 20:44:12 +00005568typedef enum {
5569 CXIdxEntityLang_None = 0,
5570 CXIdxEntityLang_C = 1,
5571 CXIdxEntityLang_ObjC = 2,
5572 CXIdxEntityLang_CXX = 3
5573} CXIdxEntityLanguage;
5574
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005575/**
5576 * \brief Extra C++ template information for an entity. This can apply to:
5577 * CXIdxEntity_Function
5578 * CXIdxEntity_CXXClass
5579 * CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticMethod
5580 * CXIdxEntity_CXXInstanceMethod
5581 * CXIdxEntity_CXXConstructor
5582 * CXIdxEntity_CXXConversionFunction
5583 * CXIdxEntity_CXXTypeAlias
5584 */
5585typedef enum {
5586 CXIdxEntity_NonTemplate = 0,
5587 CXIdxEntity_Template = 1,
5588 CXIdxEntity_TemplatePartialSpecialization = 2,
5589 CXIdxEntity_TemplateSpecialization = 3
5590} CXIdxEntityCXXTemplateKind;
5591
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005592typedef enum {
5593 CXIdxAttr_Unexposed = 0,
5594 CXIdxAttr_IBAction = 1,
5595 CXIdxAttr_IBOutlet = 2,
5596 CXIdxAttr_IBOutletCollection = 3
5597} CXIdxAttrKind;
5598
5599typedef struct {
5600 CXIdxAttrKind kind;
5601 CXCursor cursor;
5602 CXIdxLoc loc;
5603} CXIdxAttrInfo;
5604
5605typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4d873b72011-12-15 00:05:00 +00005606 CXIdxEntityKind kind;
5607 CXIdxEntityCXXTemplateKind templateKind;
5608 CXIdxEntityLanguage lang;
5609 const char *name;
5610 const char *USR;
5611 CXCursor cursor;
5612 const CXIdxAttrInfo *const *attributes;
5613 unsigned numAttributes;
5614} CXIdxEntityInfo;
5615
5616typedef struct {
5617 CXCursor cursor;
5618} CXIdxContainerInfo;
5619
5620typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005621 const CXIdxAttrInfo *attrInfo;
5622 const CXIdxEntityInfo *objcClass;
5623 CXCursor classCursor;
5624 CXIdxLoc classLoc;
5625} CXIdxIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo;
5626
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005627typedef enum {
5628 CXIdxDeclFlag_Skipped = 0x1
5629} CXIdxDeclInfoFlags;
5630
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005631typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005632 const CXIdxEntityInfo *entityInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005633 CXCursor cursor;
5634 CXIdxLoc loc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis663c8ec2011-12-07 20:44:19 +00005635 const CXIdxContainerInfo *semanticContainer;
5636 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005637 * \brief Generally same as #semanticContainer but can be different in
Argyrios Kyrtzidis663c8ec2011-12-07 20:44:19 +00005638 * cases like out-of-line C++ member functions.
5639 */
5640 const CXIdxContainerInfo *lexicalContainer;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005641 int isRedeclaration;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005642 int isDefinition;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005643 int isContainer;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005644 const CXIdxContainerInfo *declAsContainer;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005645 /**
5646 * \brief Whether the declaration exists in code or was created implicitly
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00005647 * by the compiler, e.g. implicit Objective-C methods for properties.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005648 */
5649 int isImplicit;
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005650 const CXIdxAttrInfo *const *attributes;
5651 unsigned numAttributes;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005652
5653 unsigned flags;
5654
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005655} CXIdxDeclInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005656
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005657typedef enum {
5658 CXIdxObjCContainer_ForwardRef = 0,
5659 CXIdxObjCContainer_Interface = 1,
5660 CXIdxObjCContainer_Implementation = 2
5661} CXIdxObjCContainerKind;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005662
5663typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005664 const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005665 CXIdxObjCContainerKind kind;
5666} CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005667
5668typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005669 const CXIdxEntityInfo *base;
5670 CXCursor cursor;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005671 CXIdxLoc loc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005672} CXIdxBaseClassInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005673
5674typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005675 const CXIdxEntityInfo *protocol;
5676 CXCursor cursor;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005677 CXIdxLoc loc;
5678} CXIdxObjCProtocolRefInfo;
5679
5680typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005681 const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefInfo *const *protocols;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005682 unsigned numProtocols;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005683} CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005684
5685typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005686 const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo *containerInfo;
5687 const CXIdxBaseClassInfo *superInfo;
5688 const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo *protocols;
5689} CXIdxObjCInterfaceDeclInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005690
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005691typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9b9f7a92011-12-13 18:47:45 +00005692 const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo *containerInfo;
5693 const CXIdxEntityInfo *objcClass;
5694 CXCursor classCursor;
5695 CXIdxLoc classLoc;
5696 const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo *protocols;
5697} CXIdxObjCCategoryDeclInfo;
5698
5699typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005700 const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis93db2922012-02-28 17:50:33 +00005701 const CXIdxEntityInfo *getter;
5702 const CXIdxEntityInfo *setter;
5703} CXIdxObjCPropertyDeclInfo;
5704
5705typedef struct {
5706 const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005707 const CXIdxBaseClassInfo *const *bases;
5708 unsigned numBases;
5709} CXIdxCXXClassDeclInfo;
5710
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005711/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005712 * \brief Data for IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005713 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c7735e52011-10-18 15:50:50 +00005714typedef enum {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005715 /**
5716 * \brief The entity is referenced directly in user's code.
5717 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c7735e52011-10-18 15:50:50 +00005718 CXIdxEntityRef_Direct = 1,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005719 /**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00005720 * \brief An implicit reference, e.g. a reference of an Objective-C method
5721 * via the dot syntax.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005722 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005723 CXIdxEntityRef_Implicit = 2
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c7735e52011-10-18 15:50:50 +00005724} CXIdxEntityRefKind;
5725
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005726/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005727 * \brief Data for IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005728 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005729typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis663c8ec2011-12-07 20:44:19 +00005730 CXIdxEntityRefKind kind;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005731 /**
5732 * \brief Reference cursor.
5733 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005734 CXCursor cursor;
5735 CXIdxLoc loc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005736 /**
5737 * \brief The entity that gets referenced.
5738 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005739 const CXIdxEntityInfo *referencedEntity;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005740 /**
5741 * \brief Immediate "parent" of the reference. For example:
5742 *
5743 * \code
5744 * Foo *var;
5745 * \endcode
5746 *
5747 * The parent of reference of type 'Foo' is the variable 'var'.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis25cb0ff2011-12-13 18:47:41 +00005748 * For references inside statement bodies of functions/methods,
5749 * the parentEntity will be the function/method.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005750 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005751 const CXIdxEntityInfo *parentEntity;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005752 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis25cb0ff2011-12-13 18:47:41 +00005753 * \brief Lexical container context of the reference.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005754 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005755 const CXIdxContainerInfo *container;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005756} CXIdxEntityRefInfo;
5757
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005758/**
5759 * \brief A group of callbacks used by #clang_indexSourceFile and
5760 * #clang_indexTranslationUnit.
5761 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005762typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005763 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005764 * \brief Called periodically to check whether indexing should be aborted.
5765 * Should return 0 to continue, and non-zero to abort.
5766 */
5767 int (*abortQuery)(CXClientData client_data, void *reserved);
5768
5769 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005770 * \brief Called at the end of indexing; passes the complete diagnostic set.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005771 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005772 void (*diagnostic)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005773 CXDiagnosticSet, void *reserved);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005774
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005775 CXIdxClientFile (*enteredMainFile)(CXClientData client_data,
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005776 CXFile mainFile, void *reserved);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005777
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005778 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005779 * \brief Called when a file gets \#included/\#imported.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005780 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005781 CXIdxClientFile (*ppIncludedFile)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005782 const CXIdxIncludedFileInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005783
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005784 /**
5785 * \brief Called when a AST file (PCH or module) gets imported.
5786 *
5787 * AST files will not get indexed (there will not be callbacks to index all
5788 * the entities in an AST file). The recommended action is that, if the AST
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005789 * file is not already indexed, to initiate a new indexing job specific to
5790 * the AST file.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005791 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005792 CXIdxClientASTFile (*importedASTFile)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005793 const CXIdxImportedASTFileInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005794
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005795 /**
5796 * \brief Called at the beginning of indexing a translation unit.
5797 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005798 CXIdxClientContainer (*startedTranslationUnit)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005799 void *reserved);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005800
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005801 void (*indexDeclaration)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005802 const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005803
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005804 /**
5805 * \brief Called to index a reference of an entity.
5806 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005807 void (*indexEntityReference)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005808 const CXIdxEntityRefInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005809
5810} IndexerCallbacks;
5811
NAKAMURA Takumiaacef7e2011-11-11 02:51:09 +00005812CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_index_isEntityObjCContainerKind(CXIdxEntityKind);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005813CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo *
5814clang_index_getObjCContainerDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005815
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005816CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCInterfaceDeclInfo *
5817clang_index_getObjCInterfaceDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
5818
NAKAMURA Takumiaacef7e2011-11-11 02:51:09 +00005819CINDEX_LINKAGE
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005820const CXIdxObjCCategoryDeclInfo *
5821clang_index_getObjCCategoryDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
5822
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005823CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo *
5824clang_index_getObjCProtocolRefListInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005825
Argyrios Kyrtzidis93db2922012-02-28 17:50:33 +00005826CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCPropertyDeclInfo *
5827clang_index_getObjCPropertyDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
5828
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005829CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo *
5830clang_index_getIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo(const CXIdxAttrInfo *);
5831
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005832CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxCXXClassDeclInfo *
5833clang_index_getCXXClassDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
5834
5835/**
5836 * \brief For retrieving a custom CXIdxClientContainer attached to a
5837 * container.
5838 */
5839CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIdxClientContainer
5840clang_index_getClientContainer(const CXIdxContainerInfo *);
5841
5842/**
5843 * \brief For setting a custom CXIdxClientContainer attached to a
5844 * container.
5845 */
5846CINDEX_LINKAGE void
5847clang_index_setClientContainer(const CXIdxContainerInfo *,CXIdxClientContainer);
5848
5849/**
5850 * \brief For retrieving a custom CXIdxClientEntity attached to an entity.
5851 */
5852CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIdxClientEntity
5853clang_index_getClientEntity(const CXIdxEntityInfo *);
5854
5855/**
5856 * \brief For setting a custom CXIdxClientEntity attached to an entity.
5857 */
5858CINDEX_LINKAGE void
5859clang_index_setClientEntity(const CXIdxEntityInfo *, CXIdxClientEntity);
5860
5861/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005862 * \brief An indexing action/session, to be applied to one or multiple
5863 * translation units.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005864 */
5865typedef void *CXIndexAction;
5866
5867/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005868 * \brief An indexing action/session, to be applied to one or multiple
5869 * translation units.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005870 *
5871 * \param CIdx The index object with which the index action will be associated.
5872 */
5873CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIndexAction clang_IndexAction_create(CXIndex CIdx);
5874
5875/**
5876 * \brief Destroy the given index action.
5877 *
5878 * The index action must not be destroyed until all of the translation units
5879 * created within that index action have been destroyed.
5880 */
5881CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_IndexAction_dispose(CXIndexAction);
5882
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005883typedef enum {
5884 /**
5885 * \brief Used to indicate that no special indexing options are needed.
5886 */
5887 CXIndexOpt_None = 0x0,
5888
5889 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005890 * \brief Used to indicate that IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference should
5891 * be invoked for only one reference of an entity per source file that does
5892 * not also include a declaration/definition of the entity.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005893 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisfb7d1452012-01-14 00:11:49 +00005894 CXIndexOpt_SuppressRedundantRefs = 0x1,
5895
5896 /**
5897 * \brief Function-local symbols should be indexed. If this is not set
5898 * function-local symbols will be ignored.
5899 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7e747952012-02-14 22:23:11 +00005900 CXIndexOpt_IndexFunctionLocalSymbols = 0x2,
5901
5902 /**
5903 * \brief Implicit function/class template instantiations should be indexed.
5904 * If this is not set, implicit instantiations will be ignored.
5905 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis6c9ed7d2012-03-27 21:38:03 +00005906 CXIndexOpt_IndexImplicitTemplateInstantiations = 0x4,
5907
5908 /**
5909 * \brief Suppress all compiler warnings when parsing for indexing.
5910 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005911 CXIndexOpt_SuppressWarnings = 0x8,
5912
5913 /**
5914 * \brief Skip a function/method body that was already parsed during an
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00005915 * indexing session associated with a \c CXIndexAction object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005916 * Bodies in system headers are always skipped.
5917 */
5918 CXIndexOpt_SkipParsedBodiesInSession = 0x10
5919
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005920} CXIndexOptFlags;
5921
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005922/**
5923 * \brief Index the given source file and the translation unit corresponding
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005924 * to that file via callbacks implemented through #IndexerCallbacks.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005925 *
5926 * \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will
5927 * be passed to the invoked callbacks.
5928 *
5929 * \param index_callbacks Pointer to indexing callbacks that the client
5930 * implements.
5931 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005932 * \param index_callbacks_size Size of #IndexerCallbacks structure that gets
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005933 * passed in index_callbacks.
5934 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005935 * \param index_options A bitmask of options that affects how indexing is
5936 * performed. This should be a bitwise OR of the CXIndexOpt_XXX flags.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005937 *
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00005938 * \param[out] out_TU pointer to store a \c CXTranslationUnit that can be
5939 * reused after indexing is finished. Set to \c NULL if you do not require it.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005940 *
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00005941 * \returns 0 on success or if there were errors from which the compiler could
Eric Christopher2c4555a2015-06-19 01:52:53 +00005942 * recover. If there is a failure from which there is no recovery, returns
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00005943 * a non-zero \c CXErrorCode.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005944 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005945 * The rest of the parameters are the same as #clang_parseTranslationUnit.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005946 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005947CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_indexSourceFile(CXIndexAction,
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005948 CXClientData client_data,
5949 IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks,
5950 unsigned index_callbacks_size,
5951 unsigned index_options,
5952 const char *source_filename,
5953 const char * const *command_line_args,
5954 int num_command_line_args,
5955 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
5956 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
5957 CXTranslationUnit *out_TU,
5958 unsigned TU_options);
5959
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005960/**
Benjamin Kramerc02670e2015-11-18 16:14:27 +00005961 * \brief Same as clang_indexSourceFile but requires a full command line
5962 * for \c command_line_args including argv[0]. This is useful if the standard
5963 * library paths are relative to the binary.
5964 */
5965CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_indexSourceFileFullArgv(
5966 CXIndexAction, CXClientData client_data, IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks,
5967 unsigned index_callbacks_size, unsigned index_options,
5968 const char *source_filename, const char *const *command_line_args,
5969 int num_command_line_args, struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
5970 unsigned num_unsaved_files, CXTranslationUnit *out_TU, unsigned TU_options);
5971
5972/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005973 * \brief Index the given translation unit via callbacks implemented through
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005974 * #IndexerCallbacks.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005975 *
5976 * The order of callback invocations is not guaranteed to be the same as
5977 * when indexing a source file. The high level order will be:
5978 *
5979 * -Preprocessor callbacks invocations
5980 * -Declaration/reference callbacks invocations
5981 * -Diagnostic callback invocations
5982 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005983 * The parameters are the same as #clang_indexSourceFile.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005984 *
Eric Christopher2c4555a2015-06-19 01:52:53 +00005985 * \returns If there is a failure from which there is no recovery, returns
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005986 * non-zero, otherwise returns 0.
5987 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005988CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_indexTranslationUnit(CXIndexAction,
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005989 CXClientData client_data,
5990 IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks,
5991 unsigned index_callbacks_size,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005992 unsigned index_options,
5993 CXTranslationUnit);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005994
5995/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005996 * \brief Retrieve the CXIdxFile, file, line, column, and offset represented by
5997 * the given CXIdxLoc.
5998 *
5999 * If the location refers into a macro expansion, retrieves the
6000 * location of the macro expansion and if it refers into a macro argument
6001 * retrieves the location of the argument.
6002 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00006003CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_indexLoc_getFileLocation(CXIdxLoc loc,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00006004 CXIdxClientFile *indexFile,
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00006005 CXFile *file,
6006 unsigned *line,
6007 unsigned *column,
6008 unsigned *offset);
6009
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00006010/**
6011 * \brief Retrieve the CXSourceLocation represented by the given CXIdxLoc.
6012 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00006013CINDEX_LINKAGE
6014CXSourceLocation clang_indexLoc_getCXSourceLocation(CXIdxLoc loc);
6015
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00006016/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2bff5162015-04-13 16:55:04 +00006017 * \brief Visitor invoked for each field found by a traversal.
6018 *
6019 * This visitor function will be invoked for each field found by
6020 * \c clang_Type_visitFields. Its first argument is the cursor being
6021 * visited, its second argument is the client data provided to
6022 * \c clang_Type_visitFields.
6023 *
6024 * The visitor should return one of the \c CXVisitorResult values
6025 * to direct \c clang_Type_visitFields.
6026 */
6027typedef enum CXVisitorResult (*CXFieldVisitor)(CXCursor C,
6028 CXClientData client_data);
6029
6030/**
6031 * \brief Visit the fields of a particular type.
6032 *
6033 * This function visits all the direct fields of the given cursor,
6034 * invoking the given \p visitor function with the cursors of each
6035 * visited field. The traversal may be ended prematurely, if
6036 * the visitor returns \c CXFieldVisit_Break.
6037 *
6038 * \param T the record type whose field may be visited.
6039 *
6040 * \param visitor the visitor function that will be invoked for each
6041 * field of \p T.
6042 *
6043 * \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will
6044 * be passed to the visitor each time it is invoked.
6045 *
6046 * \returns a non-zero value if the traversal was terminated
6047 * prematurely by the visitor returning \c CXFieldVisit_Break.
6048 */
6049CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Type_visitFields(CXType T,
6050 CXFieldVisitor visitor,
6051 CXClientData client_data);
6052
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2bff5162015-04-13 16:55:04 +00006053/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00006054 * @}
6055 */
6056
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00006057/**
6058 * @}
6059 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00006060
Ted Kremenekb60d87c2009-08-26 22:36:44 +00006061#ifdef __cplusplus
6062}
6063#endif
6064#endif